1651 Operators Handbook PDF

Operator’s Handbook
Alcatel
1651SM & 1661SM-C
1651SM Rel.2.5 & 2.5.1

622Mbit/s (STM–4) Add–Drop Synchronous Multiplexer
1661SM-C Rel.1.5 & 1.5.1

2.5 Gbit/s (STM–16) Compact ADM
SW VERSION ’C2’ ON
957.120.732 A Ed.05 3AL 36566 AAAA Ed.05

957.120.732 A Ed.05 3AL 36566 AAAA Ed.05
1651SM 2.5&1661SM–C 1.5 OPERATOR’S HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.6 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.7 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7.5 Notes on Ed.04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7.6 Notes on Ed.05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2 Norms and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.1 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.2 Operative ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.3 Physical supports of the release software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.2 Product Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1 Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
05 990604 SC99060703 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE S.SCANABISSI ITAVE

E. CORRADINI
04 990125 SC98120910 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE S.SCANABISSI ITAVE
E. CORRADINI
01 970721 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE A.CORRAO ITAVE
E. CORRADINI S.SCANABISSI–C.FAVERO
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1651SM 2.5&1661SM–C 1.5

SW VERSION ’C2’ ON
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 1 / 436
436
2.2.2 Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.3 Alarms, status and remote–controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.2.5 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

2.2.6 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

2.2.7 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.2.8 Mediation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4 DIALOGUE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2 Operator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3 Alarm synthesis window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.4 Administrative application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.2 Operator option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5 Configuration Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.5.3 Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.5.4 Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.5.5 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.5.6 Local Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.5.7 Routing Table Configuration Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.6 Alarm, status & control application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.7 Maintenance Memory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.7.2 Receive Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.7.3 File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.7.4 Clear option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
4.8.2 File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.8.3 View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.8.4 Mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.8.5 Configure option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
4.8.6 Termination point description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.9 Software Download Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.9.1 SW downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.9.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.10 Remote Inventory Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.10.2 Receive Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4.10.3 File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.11 Mediation Function applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function . . . . 329
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal . . . . 329
4.12.2 How to create the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 2 / 436
436
4.12.4 NECTAS activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
4.12.6 Time Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
2 START–UP OF THE PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

2.1 Scope of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.2 Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.3 Check on the windows system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
3 INSTALLATION OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . 353

3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4 START–UP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

4.2 Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.2.1 Start–up with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.2.2 Start–up with Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2 MEDIATION

FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
2.2 Graphical representation of the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and without equipment’s
label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
2.5 Configuration of the Network elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

4.2 Display alarm status & control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
5 LOG ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

5.2 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
5.3 Maintenance memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 3 / 436
436
6.2 How to modify files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

7.1.1 How to back–up files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

7.2 Configuration files back–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.3 Stored alarms and events file back–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file back–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.5 Remote Inventory file back–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
8 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

8.2 Shut–down of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8.3 Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
2 PC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
3 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND PC RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

3.2 Shut–down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
3.2.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
3.2.2 Shut Down with WINDOWS 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
3.3 Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4.1 Meaning of the Alarms – Identified by means Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.1.1 Alarms / status common to the units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

2.1 SW Download from Rel. . 2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
2.1.1 Use of the conversion files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updated
SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
2.3.1 Installing the ”SWP equipment controller SWDL” applicative on the P.C. . . . . . . . . . . . 424
2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
3 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
3.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
3.3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 4 / 436
436
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
Figure 1. Operator identifier and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Figure 2. Alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Figure 3. Data on software product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 4. View selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 5. Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 6. View (card release) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 7. Bell selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 8. Alarm synthesis – Application choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 9. Alarm synthesis – History, display, print or file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 10. Alarm synthesis – Selection on history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 11. Alarm synthesis – Selection on secondary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 12. Alarm synthesis – Selection on mnemonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 13. Alarm synthesis – History data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 14. Types of cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 15. Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 16. Administrative – Functions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 17. Administrative – Logout acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 18. Administrative – Password change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 19. Administrative – Password Change Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 20. Administrative – Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 21. Administrative – Create Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 22. Administrative – Modify. select Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 23. Administrative – Modify Operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 24. Administrative – Delete, Select Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 25. Administrative – Delete acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 27. Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 28. Equipment Configuration – Table Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 29. Configuration – File options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 30. Configuration – Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 31. Configuration – Open, detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 32. Configuration – Save as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 33. Configuration – Send file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 34. Configuration – Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 35. Configuration – Audit result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 36. Configuration – Save previous file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 37. Equipment Configuration – Subrack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 38. Equipment Configuration – Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 39. Equipment Configuration – EPS/APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 40. Equipment Configuration . MS–SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 41. Equipment Configuration – APS configuration on Signal Degrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 42. Equipment Configuration – Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 43. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 44. Equipment Configuration – Bidirectional transmission on single fiber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 45. Equipment Configuration – Sync. Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 46. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – ADM Type and Trib. Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 47. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – Priority List Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. Equipment Configuration– Synch. – SSM Value Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Figure 49. Equipment Configuration – BER Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 50. Equipment Configuration – Consequent actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 5 / 436
436
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration – G.784 BBE Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 52. Equipment Configuration – G.784 ES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 53. Equipment Configuration – G.784 SES Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 54. Equipment Configuration – G.784 Performance Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 55. Equipment Configuration – Equipment Alarm criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 56. Equipment Configuration – STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 57. Equipment Configuration – Office alarms delay configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 58. Equipment Configuration – Housekeeping assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 59. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf,subrack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 60. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 61. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, EPS/APS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 62. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 63. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, alarm criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 64. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 65. Insert to East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 66. Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 67. Drop unprotected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 68. Drop protected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 69. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 70. Drop/Insert protected, East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 71. Pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 72. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 73. Bidirectional–Trib. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 74. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 75. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 76. Drop and Continue West and Insert West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 77. Drop and Continue East and Insert West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 78. Drop and Continue East and Insert East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 79. Drop and Continue West and Insert East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 80. MS SPRING – Drop and Continue Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 81. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 82. Tributary insert + cross–connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 83. Connection configuration with Full Matrix – Enhanced Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 84. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – West Agg. Payload structure . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 85. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Tributary payload structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 86. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Signal label Agg. VC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 87. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. Signal label for trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 88. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix AU4 drop/insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 89. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration . . . . 144
Figure 90. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Squelching table for HO container . . . . . . . 146
Figure 91. Connection Config. with Full Matrix – Squelching table for terminated LO container
(not operative in this release) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 92. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AU4 Cross–connection for Aggregates . . 148
Figure 93. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix AU4 Cross–Connection for tributaries . . . . . 149
Figure 94. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AU4 Pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 95. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU drop/insert, tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 96. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU cross–connection. Aggregate . . . . . . . 154
Figure 97. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU cross–connection Tributary . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 98. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 2 Mb/s tributary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 99. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 34 Mb/s and 45 Mbit/s tributary conditions . 157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 100. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions . . . 158
Figure 101. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU pass–through Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 102. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AUX/EOW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 103. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 6 / 436
436
Figure 104. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix Signal label tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 105. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – AU–4 drop/insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 106. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – 140 Mbit/s Tributary Port Configuration . 167
Figure 107. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – AU–4 Pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 108. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Figure 109. DROP SHELF Connection config. – STM–1E module connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 110. DROP SHELF Connection Config. – Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 111. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – TU’s cross connection. DS tributaries . . . . 174
Figure 112. DROP SHELF Connection Config.– 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element) 175
Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib. . . . . . 175
Figure 114. Local Configuration – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 115. Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 116. Local Configuration – OS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 117. Local Configuration – MS LAPD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 118. Mediation Function Configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 119. Local Configuration – Ethernet address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 120. Local Configuration – L2 only parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 121. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration (choice of element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 122. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 123. Routing Table Configuration – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 124. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of Element (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 125. Routing Table Configuration – Reachable address prefixes element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 126. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of element (MESA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 127. Routing Table Configuration – Manual ES adjacencies element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 128. Alarm,Status and Control – Main Screen,Line Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 129. Alarm,Status and Control – Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 130. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) – Line Shelf, Logical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 131. AS & C – Line Shelf, physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 132. AS & C – Main screen – Drop Shelf , Logical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 133. AS & C – Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 134. AS & C – Housekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 135. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 136. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 137. AS & C – AUX/EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 138. AS & C – 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 139. AS & C – Port 1, Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 140. AS & C – View option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 141. AS & C – View option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 142. AS & C – 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 143. AS & C – 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 144. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 145. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 5 x 2Mbit/s ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 146. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 34 Mbit/s ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 147. AS & C – 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 148. AS & C – STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 149. AS & C – Optical LVC STM1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 150. AS & C – Optical HVC STM1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 151. AS & C – Full Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 152. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOM of HPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 153. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOP of HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 154. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Figure 155. AS & C – Full Matrix, PSE of LPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 156. AS & C – Full Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 157. AS & C – Full Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label – C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 7 / 436
436
Figure 158. AS & C – STM4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 159. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 160. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 161. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Figure 162. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Figure 163. AS & C – PPS, units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 164. AS & C – PPS, TUG3 and VC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 165. AS & C – PPS, ports/TU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 166. AS & C – Software version, units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 167. AS & C – Software version, detail.(Data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 168. AS & C – MS SPRING status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 169. AS & C – OS status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 170. AS & C – ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 171. AS & C – 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 172. AS & C – 21x2M port, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 173. AS&C – PPS, units, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 174. AS&C – PPS, TUG3, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 175. AS&C – PPS, ports, Drop Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 176. Drop Shelf – Units Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 177. Drop Shelf – Software version, detail.(Data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 178. AS & C – View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 179. AS & C – History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 180. AS & C – History choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 181. AS & C – History display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 182. AS & C – Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 183. AS & C – Remote Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 184. AS & C – Remote Control, Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 185. AS & C – Remote Control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 186. Maintenance Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 187. Maintenance Memory – Receive Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 188. Maintenance Memory – Display selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 189. Maintenance Memory – Group entity selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 190. Maintenance Memory – Entity selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 191. Maintenance Memory – Group event selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 192. Maintenance Memory – Event selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 193. Maintenance Memory – Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 194. Maintenance Memory – Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 195. Maintenance Memory – File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 196. Maintenance Memory – Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 197. Maintenance Memory – Delete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 198. Maintenance Memory – Acknowledge Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 199. Maintenance Memory – Clear Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 200. Maintenance Memory – Clear acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 201. Maintenance Memory – Clear OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 202. Maintenance Memory – Selective clear selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 203. G.784 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 204. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 205. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 206. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 207. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 208. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Figure 209. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 210. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 8 / 436
436
Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 213. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 215. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 216. Software Download selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 217. Software Download main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Figure 218. Software Download Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 219. Download flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 220. SW Downloading choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 221. SW Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 222. Download in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 223. SW Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 224. Description File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 225. Software menù . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 226. SW Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 227. SW Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 228. SW functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 229. Server identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 230. Remote inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 231. Remote inventory – Receive option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 232. Remote inventory – Display selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 233. Remote inventory – Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 234. Remote inventory – Save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 235. Remote inventory – File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 236. Remote Inventory–Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 237. Remote Inventory–Delete File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 238. Remote Inventory–Delete Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 239. Operator identifier and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 240. Mediation Function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 241. Alarm synthesis – Application choice for Mediation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 242. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 243. Mediation Function: local configuration application list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 244. Mediation Function: OS configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 245. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 246. Mediation Function: NE selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 247. Mediation function: Slave NE address configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 248. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 249. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels ) . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 250. Network with NEs names defined (first column) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 251. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipment’s label . . 331
Figure 252. Pop–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 253. Network Configuration – Network creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 254. Network Configuration –Network name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 255. Network Configuration – map open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 256. Network Configuration – Save map GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 257. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 258. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 259. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Q2 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 260. Network Configuration – Locate Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 261. Network Configuration – Equipment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 262. Network Configuration –Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Figure 263. Network configuration – save and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 264. Nectas activation on local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 265. Windows – International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 9 / 436
436
Figure 266. Windows – Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 267. Icons to start–up from windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 268. General flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 269. Power supply alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Figure 270. Transmission network level structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Figure 271. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Figure 272. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Figure 273. Install Software Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Figure 274. Application Choice – Software Download (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 275. Software Download main screen (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Figure 276. Software Download menu (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Figure 277. SW downloading choice (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Figure 278. Software downloading application (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Figure 279. SW information (data are an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Figure 280. Initial set–up SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Figure 281. Download installation interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Figure 282. Installation incomplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figure 283. Directory editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Figure 284. Installation in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Figure 285. Installation completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Figure 286. Installation icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Figure 287. Software Download main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Figure 288. 1651SM ring network to be changed in a1661SM–C ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 3. Handbook Configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 4. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Table 5. Software products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 8. TU12 Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 9. AS–C Colors of the Alarms Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Table 10. Card/slot relationship – LINE SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Table 11. Card/slot relationship – DROP SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Table 12. Detailed levels common indications ( active ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table 14. Events details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Table 18. STM16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 19. STM4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 20. Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary and Electrical STM–1 Switch Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 21. Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 26. Tributary 34/2–5 x 2 Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 27. Full Matrix (NB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Table 28. Descriptor file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis – Network Stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 10 / 436
436
Table 30. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 31. Alarm status and remote control general indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Table 32. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Table 34. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Table 35. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Table 36. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Table 37. Alarms of the 21 x 2 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Table 38. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Table 39. Full Matrix Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Table 40. Clock Reference Unit alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Table 41. AUX/EOW Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Table 42. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Table 43. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 44. Consequent Action Aggregate STM–4/STM–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 45. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 46. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 47. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 48. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 49. Consequent Action 21 x 2Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Table 50. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Table 51. Consequent Action FULL MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Table 52. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Table 53. Connection Configuration to be used in the upgrade operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 11 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
12 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
13 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
14 / 436
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information

WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM & 1661SM-C 3AL 34643 AAAA 521.200.100
1641SM-D 3AL 34644 AAAA 521.200.200
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM 2.5
’C2’ on 3AL 34623 AEAA 521.552.900
1661SM-C 1.5
1651SM 2.5.1
’C2’ on 3AL 34623 AEAB 521.574.200
1661SM-C 1.5.1
1641SM-D 1.0 ––– 3AL 34434 AAAA 521.551.800
N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s
”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
For further information on the software product and its physical distribution support refer to para.1.3 on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
page 35.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 15 / 436
436
1.3 General
Reference must be made to the Technical Handbook (see next para.1.4) with regard to the following
general information:

– Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
– Handbook supply to Customers
– Aims of standard Customer Documentation
– Handbook updating
• Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
• Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
• Changes due to new product-release
1.4 Product-release handbooks
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release
is stated on the manual’s front page consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
FACTORY THIS
HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HANDBOOK
1651SM Rel.2.5 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.5

3AL 36565 AAAA 955.100.512 H
Technical Handbook
1651SM Rel.2.5.1 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1

3AL 36668 AAAA 955.100.562 K
Technical Handbook
1641SM-D Rel.1.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 35754 AAAA 955.100.182 F
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control
FACTORY THIS
HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HANDBOOK
1651SM Rel.2.5 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.5

&
3AL 36566 AAAA 957.120.732 A
1651SM Rel.2.5.1 & 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1
Operator’s Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 16 / 436
436
1.5 Purpose of the handbook
This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the
operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook
(see para. 1.2 on page 15).

This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook and does not replicate
information contained into it.
In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding
operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from
the Technical Handbook.
If the application can be accessed by different types of operators, the information for all the operators
involved is properly subdivided into all the chapters constituting the handbook (see para. 1.6 on page 18).
When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:
• the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment
(product-release) this handbook refers to.
• how to use a PC and the Windows environment applications.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 17 / 436
436
1.6 Handbook structure
This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for Instruction
Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RACC. R29/82).

This handbook is divided into the following main topics (SECTIONS) as described in the Table of Contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety rules and handbook

structure.
DESCRIPTION: This section provides all the general and detailed descriptions
(including eventual appendices) required by all types of
operators to properly execute the procedures described in the
sections that follow.
COMMISSIONING: The chapters of this section contain the procedures needed to

load and activate the software application on the system.
OPERATION: By operation it is meant the use of the software application

needed to carry out the main functions according to the design
objectives.
Therefore, this section comprises all the application usage pro-
cedures, except those indicated in the MAINTENANCE section.
MAINTENANCE: This section contains all the procedures concerning

maintenance (hardware) to the equipment on which the
application is loaded, and to the software applicative.
GENERAL PROCEDURES: Section included (but not necessarily used) containing all the
procedures common to the COMMISSIONING and/or
OPERATION and/or MAINTENANCE functions.
ANNEX: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
N.B. The COMMISSIONING, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE and GENERAL PROCEDURES

sections consist of chapters representing a specific procedure.
Whenever possible, each procedure shall contain the information of a well–defined function so
that the Customer can have various handbooks required for each type of operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 18 / 436
436
1.7 Handbook configuration check
1.7.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
n = new part
m = modified part
p = provisional part
d = deleted part
Table 3. Handbook Configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
DESCRIPTIONS n
1. HW/SW Prerequisites For Software Loading n m m
2. Operative Functions n m
3. Product Interface n
4. Dialogue Mode n m m m m
COMMISSIONING n
1. Introduction n
2. Start–up of the PC n m m
3. Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW n m m
4. Start–up of the SWP Craft Terminal Applicative SW n m m
OPERATION n
1. Introduction n
Network Configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2
2. n
Mediation Function
3. NE 1651SM / 1661SM–C Software Configuration n
4. Display of the Network Element Status n
5. Log Access n
6. Configuration files modification n
7. Operating Routine Procedure n m m
8. Software Shut–Down and Restart n
MAINTENANCE n
1. Introduction n
2. PC Maintenance n
3. Software Shut–Down and PC Restart n m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting) n m m

5. Unit Replacement with a Spare n m
Table continues
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 19 / 436
436
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
GENERAL PROCEDURES n m

1. Introduction n

2. Software Download n m m m
3. 1651SM Ring upgrading into 1661 n m
ANNEXES (LIST) n
1. Annexes
A Not envisaged
1.7.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on July 21, 1997 is the first validated and officially released version of the handbook.
Ed.02 created on February 23, 1998 has been done to align the handbook contents to the new ’B’
software version that guarantees the compatibility with the WINDOWS 95 platform. Improvements on
EACT algorithm description and detailed criteria in order to declare SES in case of Erored Blocks (PM
Application) has been added.
Ed.03 created on October 12, 1998 has been done to align the handbook contents to the new ’C’ software
version . Improvements on ECT algorithm description have been added.
Ed.04 created on January 15, 1999 is the fourth validated and officially released version of the handbook
has been done to add the following procedure:
• Operating sequence to configure the MS SPRING algorithm (Dialogue Chapter – Descriptions
Section).
Moreover the Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW, have been revised (Dialogue Chapter –
Descriptions Section).
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.03 to Ed.04
Ed.05 created on June 04, 1999 is the fifth validated and officially released version of the handbook. It
has been done to align the handbook contents to the new ’C2’ Software Version:
• A better specified procedure to upgrade a STM4 Ring towards a STM16 ring Network (General
Procedure) has been done.
• Eliminated the constraint regarding the Main Units in EPS protection, as preliminary condition
to the SW downloaded Activation (General Procedure – Software Download)
• Improved description of the configuration files conversion, following a new SW release
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
download (General Procedure – Software Download)

• Corrected errors of the previous Edition.
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.04 to Ed.05.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 20 / 436
436
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 21 / 436
436
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying

on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.

1
Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head.

Put a hand under the patient’s head and one
2
under his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s
head and let it recline backwards as far as
possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:
place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep
3 the other fingers closed together (see fig.).
While performing these operations take a good
supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with
your mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin

and mouth keep his lips together and blow into
4 his nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if

the patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is
possible that his nose is blocked: in that case
open the patient’s mouth as much as possible
by pressing on his chin with your hand, place
5 your lips around his mouth and blow into his
oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
heaves. This second method can be used
instead of the first even when the patient’s
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils
together using the hand you were holding his
head with. The patient’s head must be kept
sloping backwards as much as possible.
6 Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expira-
tions per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or
until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 22 / 436
436
2.2 Norms and labels
Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’s designed and manufactured equipment
to obtain the following information:
– COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
– SAFETY RULES
• General rules
• Harmful optical signals
• Risk of explosion
• Moving mechanical parts
• Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
– ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
– ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD)
– EQUIPMENT LABELS
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s, loaded
with software applicative described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor’s technical
documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 23 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
24 / 436
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Other abbreviations, besides the ones indicated below, are directly explained in the Figures, Tables, ect.
containing them.
For example, the alarm acronyms indicated on the SYNTHESIS and AS & C screens are specified in the
relevant paragraphs and described on the screens. The unit alarm acronyms are specified in the
MAINTENANCE section.
Table 4. List of abbreviations
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ADM UPG Upgrading Add–Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ANV Alcatel
AS&C Alarm Status and Control
Automatic Protection Switching

APS
( New terminology is : MS Linear Trail Protection)
ATTD Attended (Alarm storing)
AU Administrative Unit
AUI Access Unit Interface
AUX Auxiliary
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
BID Bidirectional
BIP Byte Interleaving Parity
CIT (CT) Craft Interface Terminal (Craft Terminal)
CLEI Common Language Equipment Identification
CLNP Connectionless Network Protocol
CNF Configuration
CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRU Clock Reference Unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
D/C Drop and Continue
D/I Drop Insert
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 25 / 436
436
DCC2 Data Communication Channel

DC/DC Power Supply

DL Download
DRT Drift
E East
EACT Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM Electrically erasable/programmable read only memory
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EQT Equipment
ERS Element Regeneration Section
ES Errored Seconds
ES End System
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESCT Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra
GOSIP Governement Open System Interconnection Profile
HPA Higher order Path Adaptation
HPC Higher order Path Connection
HPT Higher order Path Termination
HVC Higher order Virtual Container
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IECB Intra Equipment Card Bus
IP Internet Protocol
IS Intermediate System
IS ACT In service and active
IS STBY In service and standby
ISO International Standards Organization

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ITU–T (NB1) International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunications sector
LAN Local Area Network
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 26 / 436
436
LAPD Link Acces Procedure on D–channel

LOP Loss of Pointer

LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
LPC Lower order Path Connection
LPT Lower order Path Termination
LVC Lower order Virtual Container
MAC Medium Access Control
ME Management Equipment ( referred to OS )
MM Maintenance Memory
MNE Master Network Element
MPX Multiplexer
MS – MST Multiplexer Section – Multiplexer Section Termination
MSA Multiplexer Section Adaptation
MS SPRING Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring
NE Network Element
NETCAS Network Equipment Craft Terminal Application Software
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OFS – OOFS Out of Frame Seconds
OH OverHead
ORA Out of Range of LASER output Power
OS Operation System
OSI Open System Interconnection
PBA Printed Board Assembly (synonymous with ”unit”)
PC Personal Computer
PI Phisical Interface
PJ – PJC Pointer Justification – Pointer Justification Counter
PM Performance Monitoring
P/N Part Number

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PPI Plesiochronous Physical Interface
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 27 / 436
436
Path Protection Switching ( new terminology is : Sub Network Connection

PPS
Protection )

PSE Protection Switching Element
QB3 Interface with Protocol B3
QECC Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel
R Read
RAM Random Access Memory
R – ECT REMOTE ECT
R – EACT REMOTE EACT
RS – RST Regenerator Section – Regenerator Section Termination
SA Section Adaptation
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SE Errored seconds
SES Severely Errored Seconds
SETG Sycrhonous Equipment Timing Generation Function
SM Synchronous Multiplexer
SMEC Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller
SM–C Compact Synchronous Multiplexer
SNCP Sub Network Connection Protection (substitutes PPS)
SMS Synchronous Multiplexer Section
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS Synchronous Path Section
SSM Synchronous Status Messages
SSMM Synchronous Status Messages Management
SSMA Synchronous Status Messages Algorithm
SSMB Synchronous Status Messages Byte
SSU Synchronous Supply Unit
STM1 Synchronous Transport Module 155Mbit/s

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 28 / 436
436
SW Software
SWP Software Product

SWDW Software Download
TCA Threshold cross
TMN Telecomunication Management Network
TP Terminal Points
TPI Timing Physical Interface
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group
UAS – UAS BIDI Unavailable Seconds – Bidirectional Unavailable Seconds
UAT–UT Unavailable Time
UN C2 Unequipped Signal label ( byte C2 )
VC Virtual Container
W West/Write
WTR Wait Time to Restore
NB1–
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR and CCITT)
in 1992 ( and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITU–R and ITU–T, respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 29 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
30 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
DESCRIPTIONS
31 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
32 / 436
1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING
1.1 Hardware configuration

With regard to the installation and the distribution of the product, the system configuration consists of:
– a 486 Personal Computer compliant with the following minimal configuration:
• a monochromatic video
• a Microsoft compatible mouse,
• an asynchronous communication port (referred as COM 1 or COM 2),
• one 3” 1/2 floppy disk drives (1 , 44MB)
Using Windows 3.1 and 3.11 :
– at least 8 MB of RAM,
– one 40 MB hard disk (80 MB or more can be necessary depending on equipment and/or network
size)
Using Windows 95
– at least 16 MB of RAM (using a configuration with 24 MB of RAM will increase performances)
– one 270 MB hard disk
This configuration can be completed with:
– memory extensions
– a printer (serial or parallel known by WINDOWS)
– a color video with high resolution
Using Windows 95 it is necessary to check the desktop model and the screen resolution. Select the screen
proprieties and select the Windows standard model for the desktop.
Set the screen resolution to 640x480 16 colors.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 33 / 436
436
1.2 Operative ambient
The following software items are required:

• MS–DOS Microsoft operative system of a version equal to or greater than 5.0.

• WINDOWS 3.1 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation) or 3.11.
or :
• WINDOWS 95 (Copyright Microsoft Corporation)
• Applicative software ”SWP ECT 1651 SM” implementing the equipment management
functions.
NECTAS (Copyright ALCATEL–CIT) is contained in this applicative.
• The above software applicative can be substituted with the ”SWP EACT 1651 SM” featuring:
Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool (EACT).
• The Applicative ”SWP R–ECT 1651 SM ” Remote Equip. Craft Terminal Software is available
as an alternative where a centralized management for small SDH networks is requested
( ” F ” interface ).
• The previous SWP can be substituted with the ” SWP R–EACT 1651 SM ” that supplies the
EACT feature for the Remote Craft Terminal functions.
• Applicative software ”SWP 1651 SM” containing the software program to load on the
equipment.
• The ”SWP EQ. CONTR. SWDL ” contains the SW which allows the direct access to the SW
Download function . Through it the Equipment Controller will be updated to the SW release
being currently used.
N.B. In this Release the SW applicative managing the equipment is supplied in several versions, one
excluding the other, with / without EACT ,with / without Remote Craft Terminal functions.
This Handbook describes the ”SWP R – ECT 1651 SM applicative software. The alternative
applicative software ”SWP EACT 1651 SM ” or ”SWP R – EACT 1651 SM” performs
congruence checks on the configuration functions, therefore some windows and options may
differ from those supplied in this handbook and in no way affect correct equipment
management.
Each of these applicative SW may manage the ”DROP SHELF equipment (1641 SM – D ) that
is an optional 2Mbit/s extension of the 1651 SM Line Shelf one.
The Drop Shelf is described in the relevant Technical Handbook, while the relevant PC
management is described in this Operator’s Manual.
The Drop Shelf extension management is possible only using the SMEC 2 equipment controller
unit and the DS Future Bus Termination Unit.
Nevertheless the upgrading of the ESCT equipment controller unit at the current Release is also
allowed whether the Drop Shelf extension is not implemented.
N.B. Year 2000 Data Time Compliance
The Sw Products (NE SW Package and CT SW packages) supplied, are Year 2000 compliant.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 34 / 436
436
1.3 Physical supports of the release software
The product is supplied on 3.5” disks formatted at 1.4 MB.

The diskettes are indicated in :

Table 5. Software products
FACTORY
ANV Part Number N.B.
Part Number
SWP 1651 SM Rel. 2.5 415.100.332 F 3AL 36597 AA–– 3
SWP ECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.5 415.100.333 G 3AL 36598 AA–– 1,4,8
SWP EACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.5 415.100.335 A 3AL 36600 AA–– 1,5,8
SWP R–ECT 1651 SM Rel. 2.5 415.100.334 H 3AL 36599 AA–– 1,6,8
SWP R–EACT 1651 SM Rel. 2.5 415.100.336 B 3AL 36601 AA–– 1,7,8
SWP EQ. CONTROLLER SWDL 415.100.125 Y 3AL 34939 AA–– 2
NOTE 1: Contain the ”1320 NX ENGLISH V 3.77A” NECTAS ( ALCATEL–CIT).
NOTE 2 : Software to be loaded onto the Craft Terminal to download the Equipment Controller when
the management Software is not known or not available, starting from rel. 2.3 of the
1641SM or rel. 2.1 of the 1651SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1664SM or rel. 1.0 of the 1641SMT
or rel. 1.0 of the 1655/66 SR. For details refer to para.2.3 on page 424.
NOTE 3 : Software containing the Equipment and Card controller to load
NOTE 4 : Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicative
NOTE 5 : Software containing the Craft Terminal Management Applicative with EACT
NOTE 6 : Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative
NOTE 7 : Software containing the Remote Craft Terminal Management Applicative with EACT
NOTE 8 : The Craft Terminal SW Packages manage both the Old and New Practice Equipment. The
Alarm,Status and Control – Main Screen shows if the equipment locally connected to the
CT is a New Practice or an Old Practice one. The OS is aware of this information via QB3*
interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 35 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
36 / 436
2 OPERATIVE FUNCTIONS
2.1 Introduction
As stated in ITU–T Rec. G.784, the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be controlled:
• by a PC (CIT) through interface F (in a local mode). NB.
• by a workstation utilized for the TMN through interface QB3* (in a remote mode).
This Operator’s Manual describes the PC management.
N.B. By a PC and F interface each NE can control in a remote way the NEs of a SDH network (max
32 NEs included itself) by means of the R – ECT / R – EACT SWP.
This SW Product executes the management functions required by a local operator to locally
manage the NE 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C, (included the 1641SM–D equipment that in the following
it will be considered always present) and performs the same management function for all the
NEs connected to the master in a network.
This applicative contains the facilities to recognize and reach the NEs of the network and to
perform a dialogue between Master and the other NEs of the network.
While the Master NE must be downloaded with the RECT (or R EACT) SWP, all the NEs must
be downloaded with a SWP in current release (not necessarily RECT or REACT) because this
release support the remote function.
The procedure for a Network Creation is described in para 4.11 on page 319
In the Local and Remote management the main functions permit to:
• know the failure/event conditions on the equipment
• perform the remote controls
• know information about the service quality level
• set, know and modify information about configurations.
• up–date equipment release through software download (in the local management only)
The ”SWP 1651 SM” software product is used to software load the equipment by the local operator.
The operative sequences of the software download are described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES
section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 37 / 436
436
2.2 Product Applications
After having physically connected the PC to the Equipment, open the NECTAS tool.

The first screen You see, referred as Alarm Synthesis, presents managements options, alarms & status

synthesis for each of the handled NEs, global alarm & status synthesis.
The complete list of indication and meanings is reported in para 4.3 on page 54.
The ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651 SM” functions are carried out through the following applications:
• Administrative
• Equipment configuration
• Connections configuration with Full Matrix.
• Connections configuration with VC4 Matrix
• Drop Shelf Connections configuration
• Local configuration
• Routing Table configuration
• Alarms, status and remote–controls
• Maintenance Memory
• G.784 Performance Monitoring
• Software download
• Remote Inventory
N.B. In the following the ”Full Matrix” denomination will be also used for the ”16x16” Matrix
Unit that is, for this release, only an hardware upgrade that performs the same
functions as the former. Go To Previous Document
Besides each of these 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be connected to a 1641SM –D equipment.
In the following the first will be cited as LINE SHELF and the last one as DROP SHELF.
The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminal
or Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment.
For this function the following applications are available to the operator:
• Administrative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 38 / 436
436
2.2.1 Administrative
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.

It is not used for the NE management (except for the ”logout”)

The Administrative application allows to:
• execute equipment logout operation (disconnect the operators from the NE)
• modify the password for the current operators
• create or delete the permission for the operators to access the NE

The relevant password is defined
• define the ”level” of each operator by enabling him or not to use the applications available.
• display the operations made available through the software applications for each configured
operator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 39 / 436
436
2.2.2 Configuration Application
The configuration applications are used for the software setting of the NE.
The main use of these applications concerns the turn–on of the NE in order to put it in service (operation).

They are also utilized in all the plant extension or modification.

It is also possible to verify the configuration without modification.
Different configuration applications are possible:
• Equipment configuration
• Connection configuration with Full Matrix
• Connection configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card)
• Drop Shelf Connection configuration ( SMEC EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT AND DS
FUTURE BUS TERMINATION NEEDED)
• Routing Table configuration
Each of the above can carry out the following operations:
• Create a configuration file.
The operator can utilize a list of tables called configuration parameters.

The default values of each table can be modified and saved in a configuration file.
This file will have an univocal name and will be added to the list of the configuration files that
can be sent to the NE.
• Open/Modify an existing configuration file
The operator can modify the previously created and identified configuration files as long as they
are open.
The modified data can be then stored again in the same file or a new configuration file can be
created.
• Forward a previously stored configuration file to the NE.

This condition corresponds to a change or reset of configuration data on the NE so as to activate
a specific function of the NE.
When the operator selects this option, a list of all the configuration files available for the NE
appears. The operator can select the desired configuration file.
• Receive the current configuration of the NE.
This option permits to know the configuration present on the NE. The required configuration is
stored in a file that the operator can read and control.
• Check the configuration values present on different configuration files (audit).
With this option the operator can compare different configuration files so as to detect differences
and then clear those files not corresponding to certain criteria.
• Clear a configuration file from the list.
A configuration file is cleared only after having selected its name from the list shown to the
operator
• Fill/check–in the File Header, title and indication on files
• Check the Default Status of the configuration tables.
The tables of each different configuration application can be modified and up–dated.
After having updated the configuration, the tables are sent to the NE. The TMN authorizes the execution
of the configuration procedure. The authorization is managed by the NE. If the Craft Terminal cannot
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
modify the configuration because it has been disabled by TMN, the NE forwards the Access Enabled
alarm. The latter is signalled in the general synthesis (AE).
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 40 / 436
436
2.2.2.1 Equipment Configuration Application
The application allows to realize the main software setting relating to equipment’s units functionalities as,
for example, the subrack configuration, the synchronization, the EPS/APS protection, the alarm criteria,
etc.
For the complete list refer to para.4.5.2 on page 83.
2.2.2.2 Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application
The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the equipment as, for
example, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (drop–insert, pass–through, etc), to
define the signal structure etc.
2.2.2.3 Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit)
The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the equipment at VC4
level, when the Connection Card unit is used instead of the Full Matrix.
For the complete list refer to para.4.5.4 on page 163 .
2.2.2.4 Drop Shelf Connection configuration
The application allows to realize the software setting relating to the connection of the DROP SHELF
equipment as, for example, the connection between the incoming/outgoing signals (drop–insert,
pass–through, etc).
N.B. These selections are only possible with the use of the SMEC and DS Future Bus Termination
unit.
2.2.2.5 Local Configuration Application
This application is utilized for local data configuration inherent to the NE with TMN supervisory network
management with OS or Remote Craft Terminal Management.
For the complete list refer to para. 4.5.6 on page 176 .
2.2.2.6 Routing Table Configuration Application
For the TMN management routing of messages between NE and OS is automatically carried out by means
of ”IS–IS Routing”.
Only for elements not supporting this function it is necessary to fill the Routing tables.
The Routing configuration tables are listed in para.4.5.7 on page 186.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 41 / 436
436
2.2.3 Alarms, status and remote–controls
The alarm, status and remote–control application permits to:

display the alarm and status

• display/print the alarm history and status
• enter the remote controls
The application is mainly used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshooting
purposes.
It also permits, both in the turn–on and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status conditions.
By means of the Remote Control, it is possible to test NE operative functions (for turn–on and
maintenance ).
The following description applies to both local or remote NE pertaining to a SDH subnetwork when properly
activated.
The AS & C subsystem (Alarms, Status and Remote–controls) systematically polls the equipment.
The polling time is established by the equipment when this is connected.
The messages received from the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be:
• alarms/alarm clearing
• entity status changes
• answers to the remote controls sent to the NE by the Craft Terminal.
Upon receiving the message, the AS & C must identify and display the contents and afterwards file it with
all the other alarms that have occurred on the NE.
The video shows both the logical and physical aspects of the NE.
The logical and physical structure will depend on the configuration that the operator has sent to the NE.
Only the configured units appear on the screen.
Each displayed unit is assigned with an alarm–indicating label.
When the AS&C displays a received alarm, it uses different symbols.
Depending on the severity of the alarm, i.e.:
• URGENT
• NOT URGENT
• INDICATIVE
The boxes assigned to the alarms can assume different colors and symbols according to
• the category assigned to the alarm
• the type of alarm occurred on the NE.
Each alarm has an identifier (mnemonic name) associated to a specific source (processed device).
The current alarms can be simultaneously displayed in a graphic and text format.
The alarm location can be accessed with the aid of the mouse or a set of keys on the keyboard.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The ZOOMING function gives a detailed view of each unit.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 42 / 436
436
2.2.3.1 Alarm and status handling
The NE forwards alarms and status criteria.

The Alarm, Status and Control applications (AS&C) offer three different informations on the errors:
1) Alarm synthesis indicating the active alarms and states.
2) Detail of the alarm states
3) Alarm history and status
The alarm synthesis displays the alarms occurred on the NE

This synthesis is an OR’ing of alarms classified as URGENT, NOT URGENT, INDICATIVE etc.
The alarm report is displayed when the alarms occur.
Each alarm or event is recorded in a history file containing the following information on each alarm:
• date
• hour
• unit
• type of alarm
• alarm severity
• alarm status
Data research in an alarm history file occurs through:
• date
• unit
• type of alarm
• alarm severity
or reading all the alarms
THE ALARM HISTORY IS STORED ON THE P.C. HARD DISK. The storing procedure depends on the
hard disk configuration (min. 80 Mbyte).
The video indication of the AS&C application is divided into different levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 43 / 436
436
2.2.3.1.1 First level: MAIN SCREEN
The first level, for both Line and Drop shelf shows the following functional blocks:

Alarm Synthesis block

• Logic block representation of the Equipment
• Physical block representation of the Equipment
On the screen are also represented the following functions:
• MS SPRING – Node and command Status, with reference to the MS SPRING protection (Line
Shelf only)
• OS – (Operating System Status), it shows which OS,Main or Spare, is active (Line Shelf only)
• SW VERSION it shows the SW version for all units
• PPS (SNCP) – Contains two forced switch (EAST/WEST) indications
The synthesis indicates the status of the equipment through highlighted screen labels that reports general
alarms and status indication as urgent / not urgent alarm, power fail, OS isolation, etc.
The complete list can be found in Table 9. on page 190.
The logic block if opened by clicking on it, describes the functional units making up the equipment and
it contains two alarm indications.
Logical Alarm Synthesis – It is a synthesis of all alarms coming from all units of the equipment
Abnormal Conditions – Synthesis of AC status indications pertaining the units housed in the
Equipment
The physical block shows the equipment hardware configuration and the states of the NE units (the units
are as those of the Logical Block). It contains the following indications:
Card Fail
Internal Failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 44 / 436
436
2.2.3.1.2 Second level
Clicking inside the Logic box we reach the 2nd screen level.
Each unit housed in both Line and Drop Shelf except the VC4 Matrix (Connection Card ) and Switch unit
is provided with the following indicators:
• unit alarm
• unit abnormal condition (not for AUX/EOW Unit)
• Unit in–service or out–of–service status
• Active or stand–by status
The following indications (only for the physical box) are provided for the Switch unit and the VC4 Matrix:
• Card missing
• Card mismatch
• Card Fail (not applicable to the VC4 Matrix)
The following indication is provided for the Drop Shelf STM – 1 E Module:
• Card fail or card missing
When the slot indicates ”ACTIVE”, the AS&C application displays the units that are really in–service with
a blue coloring.
When the slot indicates ”NOT ASSIGNED”, the AS&C application displays a blank slot.
If the unit is faulty, extracted or inserted in a not assigned slot, the NE will send an alarm report.
Clicking inside the Physical box we reach a 2nd screen level in which is shown a HW configuration.
The slot No. indicated on the screen is the position of the unit inside the subrack in their sequential order
starting from left to right and from top to bottom.
2.2.3.1.3 Detailed levels
For the equipment’s unit and for the functional blocks of the main screen, deepest levels of detail are
provided. They are activated by means of the zooming function. They represent, for example, ITU–T
compliant functional blocks with the detailed alarm and status indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 45 / 436
436
2.2.3.2 Remote controls
These commands are utilized to force functions on the NE as for example: restart the software on the
equipment, alarm attending, enable/disable loopback on the units, force/clear EPS/APS protections and

synchronizations.

A complete list of the commands can be found in para 4.6.3 on page 249 .
TMN (if present) must authorize the commands because these configure the NE.
The NE manages the authorization protocol. If the alarm indicating OS isolation is present, authorization
is not necessary.
2.2.4 Maintenance Memory Application
The Maintenance Memory application enables access to a NE memory area. The latter shall contain the
data concerning beginning/ending of the events (alarms, status etc.).that have occurred on the NE proper.
The mainly application is used by the operator during the maintenance phase for troubleshooting
purposes.
It also permits, both in the turn–on and in operation phases, to check the alarms and status history.
The Maintenance Memory is structured in a series of blocks each of which is associated to an entity defined
inside the NE. Each entity consists of a series of events which, by means of blocks, can be stored inside
the Maintenance Memory.
The entities are arranged into groups.
The events can be read from the NE following operator request only, through selections carried out in the
application proper.
Moreover it is possible to:
• save the maintenance data in a file
• delete a maintenance data file
• clear the whole maintenance memory.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 46 / 436
436
2.2.5 G.784 Performance Monitoring Application
The Performance Monitoring Application permits to check the quality of the links on Sections and Path
(tributary and aggregate).
The application is mainly used to make checks, in sequence of day or quarter–of hour periods, during the
Routing Maintenance phase.
It also permits quality checks, both in the turn–on and in the ”in service” operation phases.
This application permits to:
• Enable/disable the performance monitoring counters of the NE Terminal Points (TP) by means
of different operation and configuration modes
• Display and/or print the performance monitoring results received from the NE.
• Store the performance monitoring results in a history file
The performance monitoring information is displayed on the three screen levels:
• The first level displays the error synthesis of all the enabled TP’s.
• The second level screen displays the error synthesis of the counters of the selected TP.
• The third and last level displays the values of the counters of the selected TP.
2.2.6 Software Download
This application permits to up–date the software version of the Equipment without interrupting regular
operation.
In this way the equipment follows the product evolution.
Software download is carried out by sending through the ”F” interface, the ”NE equipment software”
previously installed in the P.C.
Software download can be carried out from the Operation System, in a centralized mode in the network.
2.2.7 Remote Inventory
Remote Inventory application allow to display information about all the unit of the equipment, needed by
the customer to check and monitor the installed equipment (identification, construction data ect.).
In this way it makes easier the NE station management.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 47 / 436
436
2.2.8 Mediation function
The 1651SM/1661SM C equipment can be utilized as a Mediation device to manage, from Craft Terminal
or Operation System, other Alcatel non SDH equipment.

When this function is used, the following application (referred to the mediation function), are present:
• Administrative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 48 / 436
436
3 PRODUCT INTERFACE
The product has two main interfaces:

• User interface
• 1651 SM/1661 SM–C interface
The first interface consists of the Windows Microsoft system with windows, scrolling–down menu and
mouse functions.
The local operator can traverse the tree–structured environment thus selecting the applications and
functions allowed.
With regard to the second interface, the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C is linked to the PC through the RS 232 C
port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 49 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
50 / 436
4 DIALOGUE MODE
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter all the management operations carried out by means the craft terminal are presented.
This is made by means description of all the available screens.
The description given herein, concerns only the equipment management applications obtained with the
SWP Equipment Craft Terminal applicative.
The para 4.11 on page 319 describes the creation of a network to remote manage several NEs with a Craft
Terminal.
The software product utilizes the MicroSoft WINDOWS system which facilitates the management of the
video masks utilized for the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C.
The operator can utilize two different instruments (one cannot exclude the other) to move across the video
to select applications, operations and various menus:
• a MOUSE which permits to move the cursor (arrow) across the screen, and selections are made
by clicking one of the 2 buttons;
• a KEYBOARD which permits to use some function keys, i.e.,: TAB and arrows for vertical and
horizontal movements.
Each mask is always provided with some functional keys, specifically:
< RETURN > to confirm the choice made
< OK > \ < Cancel > to confirm or cancel a choice/request/modification
< ESC > to quit the operation in progress
< F1 > The ”Help” information depends on the selected screen.

It is arranged in pages and the operator can scroll all the pages
thus viewing all the instructions inherent to the application
involved.
The information stated above is applicable to all the operations handled by the operator.
The operative sequences concerning download is given in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
In different screen of this handbook is not indicated the release number which is instead present
in the screen displayed to the operator.
This is due to the fact that the same screen is associated to different release.
Sometimes the release number reported is only for example.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 51 / 436
436
4.2 Operator access
After having activated the procedure (see Chapter 4 on page 359 , Commissioning Section) the screen
of Figure 1. is displayed indicating the need for operator identifier and password to login.

Figure 1. Operator identifier and password
Hence the Alarm Synthesis window will appear.

The window is referred to the whole network which the present NE belongs to (see Figure 2. )
The screen shows the following indications:
• the title
• the options
• the Global Synthesis alarm pertaining to all NEs of the Network
• the equipment above / below (if any ) alarm synthesis for all those NEs that don’t take place
in main screen.
• the alarm synthesis of the NE’s
TITLE
OPTIONS
GLOBAL
ABOVE
NE’s
(LOCAL)
BELOW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. Alarm synthesis
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 52 / 436
436
For each Network Element is presented one string with the relevant synthesis of the alarm.
When for a NE the Q2 Mediation Function is activated (to manage non SDH equipment), another synthesis
string is present.
Further, for each non SDH equipment, a proper accessible synthesis string is activated.
The software is suitable for:
• operators without technical know–how

• operators with technical know–how
The ADMINISTRATIVE application assigns operators of different technical know–how with various levels
of applications.
For example, operators having no technical background must be assigned with a level which prevents
them accessing Configurations or Remote Controls. Moreover, each operators must be given a
PASSWORD.
Upon activating the application, the Synthesis line of the PC screen will display the DC alarm indicating
the Default Configuration.
The indication will disappear after that the operator sends a configuration file for each of the configuration
applications.
Moreover, each window can display the software product utilized by clicking the mouse button on the
triangular glyph at the top–left screen in the options row ( see as an example the Figure 3. )
Figure 3. Data on software product

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 53 / 436
436
4.3 Alarm synthesis window
Through the Alarm synthesis window is utilized the software product and displayed the alarms without
detailing the applications.

This window provides the following options:
VIEW, BELL, APPLICATION CHOICE, HISTORY and HELP
VIEW this option, if selected, shows the following choices (see Figure 4. on
page 55 ).
• ALPHAMODE
• GRAPHIC MODE
• FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT
• COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST
• NETWORK
• SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENT
• REFERENCES
The ALPHA MODE and GRAPHICAL MODE options allows to choose

between textual or graphical equipment synthesis and equipment
management.
The FAULTY ELEMENT / ALL ELEMENT option permits to display the

alarm synthesis of the NEs with active alarms or the alarm synthesis
of all the NEs.
By activating the COMPLETE SYNTHESIS LIST option is activated the

string inherent to the master NE 1651SM in addition to the Global
Synthesis alarm string. See Figure 5. on page 55. By clicking on the NE
1651SM string, the ”Application Choice ” option is activated.
The NETWORK option allows to initialize the Remote functionalities

after having applied the RECT configuration, stated in the Chapter 4.11
on page 319 . The alternative SUBNETWORK / EQUIPMENT choice
if selected deactivates the Remote functions and enable the simple
local management.
The REFERENCE OPTION if selected, shows the physical address

and the EEPROM version. Figure 6. on page 56 shows an example.
Only the Equipment Control Unit (designed as SMAP) SW version is
indicated. The correct version, for each unit, is listed in the file
” SWKIT.TXT” of SWP 1651SM Rel 2.5 (diskette 1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 54 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 5. Main screen
Figure 4. View selection
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
55 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 6. View (card release)
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
56 / 436
BELL this option permits to choose the DISABLE, the CUT OFF and the
ALARM CUT OFF functions. See Figure 7.
The first disables the BEEP that indicates an alarm condition on the
NE, symbol V denotes disabling; the second disables the BIP but
enables the Craft Terminal to receive the N.E.’s further alarms; the
third ” ALARM CUT OFF” attends the alarms (AT label indication)
One alarm at time is attended.
Figure 7. Bell selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 57 / 436
436
APPLICATION CHOICE this option opens a subwindow (see Figure 8. ) which permits to
select one application among those available.
The ”application choice” option is accessible after having activated

the NE local alarm synthesis string.

When activating the ”Mediation function”, another different list of
”application choice” is presented. This function is presented at para
4.11 on page 319.
Figure 8. Alarm synthesis – Application choice Go To Previous Document

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 58 / 436
436
HISTORY This function allows to store in the PC events occurred during the
operation, only when the PC is connected th the NE.
The ”HISTORY” option permits to DISPLAY, PRINT or save in a
FILE the synthesis information received from the NE
(see Figure 9. ).
The operator can select the data to DISPLAY or PRINT through the
following choices ( See Figure 10. on page 60 ):
Secondary to define which NE of the network to select the data

See Figure 11. on page 60.
Mnemonic it is possible to select ALL the synthesis alarms or a
specific Synthesis alarm from the presented list.
Date Filter When enabled (X) permits to define the Begin/end
data time of the selected ” MNEMONIC ” Synthesis
alarm.
After having selected the desired data, a 12–row video window
(containing the last 12 alarms) is available.
This window can be scrolled so as to display all the alarms con-
cerned with the selections made, listed from the most recent to the
least recent ones (see Figure 13. on page 61).
If printing had been selected instead, the printer will receive all the
messages inherent to the characteristics entered.
HELP This option permits to obtain information on the alarm synthesis

option and display the types of cursors.
To select an option, click the mouse left–button once.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Alarm synthesis – History, display, print or file selection
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 59 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 10. Alarm synthesis – Selection on history
Figure 11. Alarm synthesis – Selection on secondary
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
60 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 13. Alarm synthesis – History data
Figure 12. Alarm synthesis – Selection on mnemonic
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
61 / 436
In this release by means of the R–ECT functionality the 1651SM equipment can manage device
functions towards a max of 32 equipment pertaining to the same local network.
The management functionalities offered by the R–ECT function are similar to those offered by an OS

In fact the R – ECT product allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks.
The R–ECT functions provide a remote login facility allowing the R_ECT operator attached to one
NE via F interface, to monitor several NEs and to start a login session on the local NE or on any of
the remote configured NEs on condition that they had been loaded with a software version supporting
the R–ECT feature.
The R–ECT product permits to realize the same application of the Craft Terminal Local management
except for the Software Download, not allowed.
The R–ECT operator can select by means of the VIEW option the connection with all the NEs of the
network or the local connection directly through the F interface. For all these connections the
operator is requested to type the relevant LOGIN.
The Figure 5. on page 55 shows the Main screen in the case of single NE alarm synthesis.
It is shown the alarm synthesis of the whole network that is the ”Global synthesis” alarm string. It is
the system synthesis alarms OR’ing of the NEs managed by the R_ECT operator.
The ”Equipment above ” and the ”Equipment below” alarm synthesis concern the NEs managed by
the R_ECT operator and not displayed on the current screen.
The ”Application choice” option associated with the equipment selected, is accessed when selecting
the Equipment string.
The window also indicates the equipment name and release and the OSI address (M for ADM NE
of the network and S, not applicable in this release, for eventual PDH equipment connected to the
single NE acting as a Mediation Device). As an alternative the R_ECT operator can give a name to
the NE .
The ”Equipment above / below” alarm indication rows are always present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 62 / 436
436
The labels on these windows will change colours when an alarm condition arises. See Table 6. and
Table 7. on page 64.
The Global Synthesis labels on the Network Stations window with reference to Figure 5. on page 55 are
the followings:
Table 6. Synthesis labels and colours ( Global Synth., Network Stations)
NORMAL ALARM (or active)
EF Equipment Failure – No answer from NE White Red
DF Dialogue Failure – Wrong answer from NE White Red
AS Alarm Stop – Bell disable White Green
AT Alarm receiving attention White Magenta
UG Urgent Alarm White Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm White Yellow
HA Housekeeping Alarms White NB1
SA Service affecting – (dialog with OS) White Magenta
DA Distant Alarm (IND Network alarm synthesis) White Magenta
SF Signal Failure – (dialog with OS) White Magenta
ST Status indicator (abnormal indication) White Green
TC Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Green White (Not connected)
Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal access

enabled by the management Operative System.
AE Green White (disabled)
When ”disabled” the Local operator can ”read”
information without ”writing”.
Default Configuration: the NE is configured with

DC White Black (default)
the default values
Loss of Configuration:
LC White Red (loss)
The configurations in the N.E. are lost
Three Remote F Terminals connected.

It rises in the case of three R–ECT operators
BU White Blue
opened a management session at the same time
on the present NE. NB2
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red
for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most
severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NB2 : BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for the Remote Craft Terminal
management.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 63 / 436
436
The managed labels and colours relevant to the Local NE are:
Table 7. Synthesis labels and colours ( Local NE )

NORMAL ALARM (or active)
EF Equipment Failure – No answer from NE White Red
DF Dialogue Failure – Wrong answer from NE White Red
AT Alarm receiving attention White Magenta
UG Urgent Alarm White Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm White Yellow
HI Housekeeping Indication White NB1
IN Indicative alarm White Magenta
AC Abnormal Condition White Magenta
TC Craft Terminal Connected to the NE Green White (Not connected)
Access Enable: Local Craft Terminal access

enabled by the management Operative System.
AE Green White (disabled)
When ”disabled” the Local operator can ”read”
information without ”writing”.
Default Configuration: the NE is configured with White Black (default)

DC
the default values
Loss of Configuration: White Red (loss)

LC
The configurations in the N.E. are lost
Three Remote F Terminals connected. White Blue

It rises in the case of three R–ECT operators
BU
opened a management session at the same time
on the present NE. NB2
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping received: red for Urgent,
yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most severe alarm
is present when more than one alarm is detected.
NB2 : BU indication is only shown when a network has been created for remote Craft Terminal
management.
The labels report the alarm mnemonic only. To display the whole name of the alarm, position the mouse
pointer (depicted as a hand with pointing forefinger, see Figure 14. on page 65) on the relative label and
click and keep pressed the left mouse–button.
The alarm name will appear. This condition does not indicate if the alarm is present or not.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 64 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 14. Types of cursor
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
65 / 436
4.4 Administrative application
4.4.1 Description

By means of the Administrative application the following functions are carried out:
• Logout, thus interrupting connection between the Craft Terminal and NE.
• Modify the operator’s current password
• Display the enabled operator list and relevant allowed applications
• Create new operators
• Modify the level of the enabled operators
• Delete operators’ enable
The Administrative application can be activated by executing the following selections:
• the option ”Application choice” from the main menu.

This selection displays the list of applications available.
• the option ”Administrative” from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Administrative option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 15. ):
• File
• Receive
• Operator
• Help
Figure 15. Administrative
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu.
General information on the Administrative product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
The ”Help” option displays the description of each administrative command.

The ”File” and ”Receive” options are not operative.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The ”Operator” options is detailed in the paragraph that follow.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 66 / 436
436
4.4.2 Operator option
By selecting this option the operator accesses the administrative function (see Figure 16. ) described
hereinafter.
Figure 16. Administrative – Functions List
4.4.2.1 Logout
The selection of the ”Logout” option permits to interrupt the connection between the Craft Terminal and
the NE. The screen of Figure 17. displays the request for logout acknowledgement.
By pressing OK the Craft Terminal and the NE are disconnected and the procedure returns to the initial
phase illustrated in Figure 1. on page 52.
The ”Logout” must be executed at the end of the operations for safety reasons.
Figure 17. Administrative – Logout acknowledgement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 67 / 436
436
4.4.2.2 Password
The selection of the Password option allows to modify the password of the operator that is executing the
application.

The screen of Figure 18. is displayed. It is necessary to enter the previous password and twice the new

password. Hence click on OK, at this point the screen of Figure 19. is displayed indicating that operation
has taken place.
Figure 18. Administrative – Password change
Figure 19. Administrative – Password Change Successful

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 68 / 436
436
4.4.2.3 Date
Not used.
The date of NE is aligned with Craft Terminal date (Control Panel of Windows). Refer to para 4.12.6 on
page 344
4.4.2.4 Display
The selection of the Display option permits to view the list of authorized operators and the applications
which he is authorized to read (consult) and eventually write (intervene) (see Figure 20. ).
Figure 20. Administrative – Display

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 69 / 436
436
4.4.2.5 Create
The Create option permits to enter a new operator.

The screen of Figure 21. is displayed and the following operations must be carried out:

• Enter the Operator’s identifier
• Select the operator’s level for which he has been enabled

Figure 21. illustrates the levels and relevant names of the enabled applications
(R=read – consult, W=write – modification)
• enter the relevant password twice.
To enable click on OK.
Figure 21. Administrative – Create Operator

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 70 / 436
436
4.4.2.6 Modify
The Modify option permits to modify the operator’s profile (level). The screen of Figure 22. is displayed,
the operation required here is that of entering the selected operator’s identifier.
By clicking on OK the screen of Figure 23. is displayed.

The operator’s level can be modified. To enable, click on OK.
Figure 22. Administrative – Modify. select Operator
Figure 23. Administrative – Modify Operator profile

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 71 / 436
436
4.4.2.7 Delete
The Delete option permits to cancel one of the authorized operators.

The screen of Figure 24. allows to enter the operator’s identifier.

Hence by clicking on OK the screen of Figure 25. is displayed requesting acknowledgement.

By clicking on OK cancelling is enabled.
Create, Modify and Delete option are enabled only for ADMINistrator.
Figure 24. Administrative – Delete, Select Operator
Figure 25. Administrative – Delete acknowledge

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 72 / 436
436
4.5 Configuration Applications
4.5.1 General
There are the following types of configuration applications:
• Equipment Configuration
• Connection Configuration with Full Matrix
• Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix ( Connection Card unit )
• Drop Shelf Connection Configuration. ( Only when SMEC Equipment Controller is used ).
• Local Configuration
• Routing Table Configuration
Each of the above permit to:
• build and change a configuration file containing the connection information for the NE.
• Download and upload the file
• display or print the file
• audit the file.
The Configuration applications can be activated only by a privileged user executing the following
selections:
• the ”Application Choice” option from the main menu; this selection displays the list of the
available applications.
• one out of the Configuration Applications option from the list of applications available.
When opening a configuration application the craft terminal ”upload” the configuration of the NE.
A window shows this function (see Figure 26. on page 74) that can be stopped with ”CANCEL”.
It is possible to SAVE in a file the uploaded data (see details in the next paragraphs).
The following menu is displayed (see Figure 27. on page 74 i.e., if Equipment or Connection
Configurations are involved):
• File
• Clear Screen
• Tables
• Help
Note that the option Clear Screen is active only for SWP–RECT and SWP–ECT 1651SM packages if you
are dealing with Equipment or Connection Configuration.
Other two SW products indicated as SWP–REACT and SWP–EACT 1651 SM are available. Differences
with the previous cited SWP are indicated in the next paragraphs.
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described configuration menu.
General information on the user product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The functions of the above three options are identical for all the Configuration Applications.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 73 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 27. Equipment Configuration
Figure 26. Equipment Configuration. Upload
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
74 / 436
4.5.1.1 Configuration with ”SWP ECT or SWP R–ECT 1651SM Rel.2.5”
Option ”tables”
This option allows the user to access the configuration tables of the NE (see Figure 28. on page 78 if
Equipment Configuration is involved).
By selecting option Table the user can:
• display the tables of a previously built configuration file
• build a configuration file
The user can display a configuration file in the following manner:
• select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list of commands
– select the option Open from the list of commands and choose the configuration file to be
displayed
• select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tables
containing the chosen configuration file.
– select the tables to be displayed
The user can build a configuration file
• By using an already existing configuration file the user can:
– select the option File from the configuration menu. This selection displays the list of
commands.
– select the option Open from the list of commands and chooses the configuration file to be
modified.
– select the option Tables from the configuration menu. This choice displays the list of tables
containing the selected configuration file.
– select the tables to be modified
– modify the tables
– select the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to store the
listed table in a new configuration file or in the same previously opened file.
• by selecting the option Tables directly the listed tables are loaded with default values.
The user:
– selects the tables to be modified
– modifies the tables
– selects the option Save as or Save from the list of commands of the option File to store
the listed table in a new configuration file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
When the application is executed for the first time, no configuration file will be present; therefore if the
operator selects the option ”Open....” from Menu ”File”, no file will appear.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 75 / 436
436
To create a configuration file the operator must select the option ”Tables”, and then he can access all the
tables of the NE Configuration.
The operator receives the list of all the NE configuration tables through a window system.

The operator can browse through the whole list by scrolling it up and down using the arrow keys.

The operator can select the table with the Mouse or the enabled functional keys and click the left
mouse–button when the arrow is positioned on the <OK> indication.
He can also press the <RETURN> key to confirm selection.
Further confirmation is required to save the data that has been inserted/modified in the table. The data
is confirmed through the <OK> key which appears on each screen concerning ”Data insertion in table”.
To clear the modified/inserted data the operator must utilize the <Cancel> key. Out of the two, the
<Cancel> key has been assumed as default, because if the <Return> key is accidentally pressed,
important previously filed information could be lost.
To notify the selection made by the operator, the data of the table selected has a darker background
respect to the data of the other tables.
Options File
When the operator has inserted or modified all the table values, the save operation is still not terminated.
All the values must be saved through the option ”Save as”, or ”Save”.
This option can be selected through the FILE option in the Configuration window (see Figure 29. on page
78). The figures concern Equipment Configuration.
The complete list of the options is:
• Open....
• Save As ....
• Save ....
• Delete....
• Default Status...
• File Header...
• Print...
• Send....
• Receive...
• Audit...
The following analyzes in detail each option:
• The option ”Open” displays the list of all the configuration files present on the hard disk and also
accesses the other disks to read other configurations (see Figure 30. on page 78).
The user can select the configuration file to open, and then by means of the TABLE option can
modify the tables of the file.
With the ”Detail” selection the screen of Figure 31. on page 79. is obtained, showing more
detailed information on the selected file.
• The option ”Save As ” permits to save the modifications made in the configuration tables.
The operator can insert the name of a new file or that of an existing file (see Figure 32. on
page79 ).
In the first case the created file will contain the new configuration tables; in the second case the
new tables will be written over the existing tables if authorized by the operator.
The same screen permits to the selections:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– the configuration can be stored on different disk units

– description of the file (title) can be inserted into the created configuration file
– the operator name can be inserted.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 76 / 436
436
After this operation the operator store the configuration.
• The option ”Save” permits to save the modifications made in the configuration table over writing
the existing table with the same name.
• When the option ”Delete” is chosen by the user, the application displays the list of all the built
configuration files stored on the hard disk.
The application allows access to other configuration files on the hard disks, the user can then
select the configuration file to delete.
Detail on the files can be obtained
• The option ”Default Status” permits to access a new configuration file that holds tables
containing default values.
• The option ”File Header” displays the ”Detail” information of the currently opened configuration
file.
• The option ”Print” permits to print the configuration tables of a particular file.
The name of the file to print as well as the disk must be stated in the window.
It is also possible to print only tables different from the defend values ( x )
• The option ”Send” permits to send the selected configuration file to the NE.
After having selected this option, the operator receives the list of the configuration files that
can be sent to the NE (see Figure 33. on page79 ).
The operator must choose (from the selected disk) the configuration file to send to the NE and
confirm it through the <OK> key. ”Detail” on the files can be obtained.
The selected configuration is sent to the NE, and the download of the tables is indicated.
• The option ”Receive” permits to receive the configuration loaded on the NE.
The ”upload” function of the table is presented in a new window, in which is possible (CANCEL)
to stop the procedure.
The user inserts the file name which will store the NE configuration, as well the disk and the
”Detail ” on the file.
• The option ”Audit” permits to compare the two configuration files (see Figure 34. on page 80):
– Current file: the currently opened configuration file

– File on disk: the user selected configuration file
If differences are encountered, the application will display the relevant data for each
configuration table (see Figure 35. on page 80).
Option clear–screen
After having utilized the ”audit” option, the clear–screen option permits to clear any information from the
Application window, by clicking the left mouse–button on the Clear – Screen option.
ATTENTION: when a FILE is open and the operator needs:

– open another file
– Select the Default Status
– Send a file
– Receive a fail
another screen is present, in which is possible to decide to save the previous file data (see for
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
example Figure 36. on page 80 ).
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 77 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 30. Configuration – Open File
Figure 29. Configuration – File options
Figure 28. Equipment Configuration – Table Choice
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
78 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 32. Configuration – Save as
Figure 33. Configuration – Send file

Figure 31. Configuration – Open, detail
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
79 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 34. Configuration – Audit
Figure 35. Configuration – Audit result
Figure 36. Configuration – Save previous file
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
80 / 436
4.5.1.2 Configuration with SWP–ECT or SWP–REACT 1651SM
This software product performs checks while compiling the Equipment and Connections configurations
tables to prevent the operator from making errors when introducing the configuration data.
To that purpose the options of the two applications are enabled in subsequent steps in compliancy with
the configurations that the operator realizes. The operator is therefore guided while compiling the tables.
The ”Equipment configuration” tables are to be compiled before any other.
In particular, as far as concerns the equipment synchronization, the following compiling order has to be
followed :
1) Synchronization : ADM type and Tributary configuration
2) Synchronization : priority list configuration
3) Synchronization : SSM value configuration
Also the tables compilation is guided : the only options enabled are those compliant with the previously
made configurations.
Checks are operative inside each application (Equipment and Connection Configuration) and between the
two applications. Logical mistakes in the configuration data interrupt the configuration proper and
explanatory error messages are displayed to help the operator removing incoherences.
Two types of messages are displayed : the ”warning ” and the ”error messages” . The latter prevents the
operator from proceeding in configuring the equipment and the connections.
The Equipment Configurations allowed through the EACT control function are stored in a ”.b60” extension
file. The system opens a file using the same ”file name” with extension ”.b56” (Connection Configuration
file extension with Full Matrix) or ”.b58” (Drop Shelf Connection Configuration file extension ) or ”.b59”
(Connection Configuration file extension with VC4 Matrix) into which are stored the ”Connection
configurations” tables associated to the previously defined ”Equipment Configuration”.
The two files are interdependent in that the control system allows changes to be made (e.g., equipment
configuration) only if compatible with the contents of the ”Connection” configuration file.
When accessing the ”Connection Configuration” application it is mandatory to open the relevant file
automatically created. It is possible to modify it only in compliancy with the equipment connections made
with the ”Equipment Configuration” application ( only the possible options are enabled ) . The file changes
can be saved only if the ”Equipment Configuration ” application is closed.
When a ”receive” operation is performed and the equipment has been configured by using the EACT SWP,
both the Equipment and the Connection configuration files are received from the equipment.
When a ”send ” operation is performed , the two files are sent independently.
If a ”receive” operation is performed using the EACT SWP and the equipment was configured using ECT
SWP, checks are performed between the Equipment and the Connection configuration files. Messages
will appear if the files are not congruent according to EACT rules.
Option ”Tables”.
The only difference is that in the ”Connection Configuration” the ”Table” function is accessed after having
opened one of the ”.B56” files if for example we have to configure connections with Full Matrix (”untitled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
.B56” in the first work session) through the ”OPEN” command of the options ”File”.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 81 / 436
436
Option File
The following is a complete list of the applications provided by the option File (see Figure 29. on page 78):

Open....

• Save as ....
• Save ....
• Delete....
• Default Status...
• File Header...
• Print...
• Send....
• Receive...
• Audit...
• Update...
• Exit
Through these applications are carried out the operations described for the option File, except for:
• The option ”Update...” – it can be applied to the Equipment and Connection configurations.
It permits to send the modifications made on the configuration file to the Controller.
• Graphic format of the screens and files. The latter are located through extension number and
directory.
• The option ”Exit” that closes the application.
4.5.1.3 How to select
In either case (software product with/without EACT) and for all the Tables, configuration is achieved
through selection.
Selections are possible by clicking on the ”small box” or ”small circle” or on the relevant string present in
each table.
The cross (X) or the circled dot indicates selection mode enabled.
By clicking again, the cross or the circled dot disappears thus disabling the selection mode.
When selecting from a list, the selection operated is displayed next to the circle to which the selection is
referred.
To confirm the selections made click the OK button; to cancel click the CANCEL button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 82 / 436
436
4.5.2 Equipment Configuration Application
The following is a list of the equipment configuration table available (see Figure 28. on page 78):
– LINE SHELF CONFIGURATION:

• Subrack Configuration
• Power Supply Configuration
• EPS – APS Configuration
• MS SPRING Configuration
• APS Configuration on Signal Degrade
• Optical Safety Configuration
• Bidir. Transmission on single Fiber Configuration
• Synchronization:
– ADM Type and Tributary Configuration

– Priority List Configuration
– SSM Value Configuration
• BER Threshold Configuration
• Consequent Actions
• G.784 BBE Threshold Configuration
• G.784 ES Threshold Configuration
• G.784 SES Threshold Configuration
• G.784 Performance Points Configuration
• Alarm Criterion:
– Equipment
– STM4/STM16 Aggregate East/West
– Electrical HVC STM1 Trib.
– 140M Switchable Trib.
– 21x2M Trib. (1–3)
– 21x2M Trib. (1–3) Port (1–21)
– 3x34 Trib./3x45M Trib.
– Full Matrix
– Optical HVC STM1 Trib.
– CRU
– AUX/EOW
– Optical LVC STM1 Trib.
– 34/2 and 5x2M Tran. Mux Trib. (1–3)
– 34/2 Tran Mux 8M Port (1–3)
– 5x2M Tran Mux Trib (1–3) port (1–5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Housekeeping indication
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 83 / 436
436
• Office alarms delay facility configuration
• Housekeeping alarm indication label

N.B. The Sw set for Full Matrix is used also to manage the 16x16 Matrix Unit.

The same for 21x2 M Trib set for 21x2 M Trib with retiming and 3x45 M Trib for DVB Unit.
– DROP SHELF CONFIGURATION
• Subrack Configuration
• Power Supply Configuration
• EPS – APS Configuration
• Synchronization: tributary configuration
• Alarm criterion:
– Equipment
– ADM 600 Interface unit
– STM–1 Module
– OH Interface unit (not operative in this release)
– 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 )
– 21x2Mbit/s DS trib (1 to 9 ) port (1 to 21 )
Each of the above tables will be described in detail in the paragraphs that follow.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 84 / 436
436
4.5.2.1 Subrack configuration
The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 37. on page 88, permits to configure
each of the cards in the slots of the NE.
Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements:
• slot number – identifies its position in the NE’s physical configuration
• slot name – identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot
• small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middle
of the screen.
The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after a selection is
applicable to all the configuration screens.
The selectable options for the SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slots 1 and
15 are:
• Unassigned Card
• SW Unit 34 M or 45 M
The selectable options for SWITCH UNIT / ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE (NB) slot 14 are:
• Unassigned Card
N.B. With the New Practice equipment physical structure, the SWITCH UNITS are not present.
The switching function is realized by means the ACCESS MODULES connected to the units.
Nevertheless to configure also in this case the different types of switching, the same selections
previously indicated must be done.
The selectable options for the AUX (slot 17) are:
• AUX/EOW
• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 18 and 22 are:
• L–4.1 Aggregate STM–4

• S–4.1 Aggregate STM–4
• Unassigned Card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 85 / 436
436
The selectable options for the Aggregate, slots 19 and 23 are:


• S–4.1 Aggregate STM–4

• S.16.1 Aggregate STM–16
• UP S–16.1 Aggregate STM–16 ($)
• UP L–16.1 Aggregate STM–16 ($)
• UP L–16.2 Aggregate STM–16 ($)
• Unassigned Card
N.B. ($) The ”UP L or S–16 Aggregate” indication is referred to the units named ” ID ”
in the list of the managed items in this Release. The other ”L–16 Aggregate” new
Units for WDM (6400ps/nm), available in this Release are SW managed like the
former. See the relevant item list in the ”Description Section” of the Technical
Handbook.
ATTENTION:
STM–4 Aggregate slot 18 West 1, slot 19 East 2

slot 22 East 1, slot 23 West 2
STM–16 Aggregate slot 18+19 East,

slot 22+23 West.
two slots (18+19, 22+ 23) are assigned to each STM–16 Aggregate.
The selectable options for TRIBUTARY slots 2, 3, 4 are:
• 140M SW Tributary (*)

• Elect HVC STM1 Tributaries (*)
((*) both are referred to the 140/STM1 Switch. Trib. unit software selection)
• 21x2Mb Tributary
• Unassigned Card
• S–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.2 LVC Trib.
• S–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.2 HVC Trib.
• 3x34M Trib.
• 3x45M Trib.
• 34/2 5x2M Trib.
• DVB Trib.
N.B. The new item 21x2Mb Tributary with Retiming is managed in this release like a basic
21x2Mb Tributary.
N.B. The new item DVB Trib. is managed in this release like an unidirectional 3x45M Trib.
The select option for Tributary slots 5, 9, 10, 11, 12 are:
• 140M SW Trib.
• Elect HVC STM1 Trib.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Unassigned card
• S–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.1 LVC Trib. or L–1.2 LVC Trib.
• S–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.1 HVC Trib. or L–1.2 HVC Trib.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 86 / 436
436
• 3x34M Trib.
• 3x45M Trib.
• DVB Trib. managed like a 3x45M Trib.
The select option for Trib. spare 1, (slots 6), are:

• 140 M SW Trib.
• Elect HVC STM–1 Trib.
• 21x2 M Trib.
• 21x2Mb Tributary with Retiming managed like a 21x2Mb Tributary.
• Unassigned card
• 3 x 34 M Trib.
• 3 x 45 M Trib.
• 34/2 5x2M Trib.
• 140M/EC STM1 Trib. (*)
The select option for Trib. spare 2, (slots 13), are:
• 140 M SW Trib.
• Elect HVC STM–1 Trib.
• Unassigned card
• 3 x 34 M Trib.
• 3 x 45 M Trib.
• 140M/EC STM1 Trib. (**)
To protect a mixed composition of 140 M SW and Elect HVC STM–1 Tributaries, select the ”140 M / EC
STM–1 TRIB” (**) option for the TRIB. Spare 1 or 2 configuration.
The select option for Matrix main. slot 7 are:
• Full Matrix
• VC4 Matrix (Connection Card)
The select option for Matrix spare slot 8 are:
• Full Matrix (spare unit)

• VC4 Matrix (always present if VC4 Matrix is selected in slot 7 but not as spare for the former)
• Unassigned card
The selected options for CRU Spare, slot 20 are:
• Assigned card
• Unassigned card
The selected option for CRU Main, slot 21 is only Assigned Card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 87 / 436
436
DROP SHELF supported
This block is present to declare (with a cross) the presence of the DROP SHELF extension .

When not selected, all the tables referred to the Drop Shelf won’t be managed.

To store the selections made, click the OK key.
This operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
This configuration table will be utilized by the AS & C to read the value assigned to each slot in order to
display the logic and physical configuration of the NE.
Figure 37. Equipment Configuration – Subrack configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 88 / 436
436
4.5.2.2 Power Supply Configuration
The table shown in Figure 38. defines the availability of each of the three converters installed on the NE.
Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter’s name.
By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as ”Assigned”.
Click again to remove the cross.
This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 38. Equipment Configuration – Power Supply

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 89 / 436
436
4.5.2.3 EPS/APS Configuration
The table shown in Figure 39. on page 91 permits to select the protections available in the NE.
The EPS/APS protection functions are described in the Technical Handbook.

While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen.

The different units are selected as follows:
• CRU units
– Type of protection
D None
D EPS (protection against unit failure)
• Full Matrix unit

D None
D EPS
– Protection Architecture
D Unset (of no significance, when NONE has been previously selected)
D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare)
– Protection Mode
D Unset
D Revertive: After protection intervenes, the initial condition is restored (Main Working)
when the unit alarm disappears.
D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition
– Wait Time to Restore
D Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 seconds.), when the Revertive mode has
been selected.
Unset selection is possible.
• Aggregate units (East and West)

– Type of Protection
D None
D APS (protection against unit and line failure)
D Unset
– Protection Operation
D Unset
D Simplified. Unidirectional (single ended)
– Protection Mode
D Only Unset (automatically not revertive)

D Only Unset
• Tributary units (1 to 8)
D None
D EPS (for electrical tributary). Not available for DVB unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
D APS (for optical and electrical tributary)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 90 / 436
436
When EPS 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot)
must be ”None”

D 1+1 (1 Main + 1 Spare). Not available for 21 x 2 M Trib.

D N+1 (1 spare for N main). Not available for APS. Not available for optical STM1 Trib.
When 1+1 is selected for main trib. (odd slots) the spare Trib. (subsequent even slot) must
be ”unset”.
– Protection priority
D Unset
D Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1–> 2–>3–>4.
– Protection operation
D Unset
D Simplified (Unidirectional). Only for APS optical and electrical STM1 Trib.
– Protection Mode
D Unset
D Revertive. (for the 1+1 EPS only). After protection intervention, the initial condition
is restored (Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.
D Not revertive. The spare works even if main returns to manual conditions (for the 1+1
EPS only).
– Wait time to Restore (WTR)

Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 seconds) when the revertive mode has been
selected. Unset selection is possible.
The chosen WTR must be the same for all Tributaries.
Figure 39. Equipment Configuration – EPS/APS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 91 / 436
436
4.5.2.4 MS–SPRING Configuration
The table shown in Figure 40. permits to configure the equipment data for the MS–SPRING protection.

The parameter to set are:

– MS SPRING Enabled : Enable the MS–SPRING messages among the NE’s, without really
activate the protection in case of alarm condition
– MS SPRING Activate : Activate the MS–SPRING protection.
– Node Identifier : Insert the number of the NE’s on which we are operating.
– Ring Map : Insert the sequence of the NE of the ring, in clockwise direction.
(Clockwise Direction : W to E) For each node insert the relevant number.
Anyone can be the starting node.
– Wait Time to Restore : Permits to select the time to wait, before restore the previously
condition, when the alarm that cause the switching operation
disappears. The values are selectable at the bottom left of the
screen (5 sec, 5 min.,10 min.,15 min.).
N.B. MS SPRING and SNCP algorithm are not compatible in the same Ring. When MS SPRING
is enabled and active the eventual configuration of an SNCP protection will cause a
removal of the MS SPRING. Vice versa having done an SNCP connection we can’t
activate MS SPRING otherwise the SNCP protection wouldn’t act.
The SWP EACT provides suitable warnings.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 40. Equipment Configuration . MS–SPRING
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 92 / 436
436
4.5.2.4.1 Operative sequence to configure the MS SPRING
The operative sequence are listed in the following.

Activation Procedure:
a) in the desired order provision the ”Equipment Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= ENABLE”,
W.T.R, Node Identifies and Ring Map previously set, to each node of the ring in the desired order.
MS–SPRING must be NOT active
b) provision the ”Connections Configuration” files with desired connections and the related Squelching
Tables previously set, to each node of the ring in the desired order (see para. 4.5.3 on page119 )
c) provision the ”Equipment Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= ACTIVE” ( MS–SPRING is

already enabled ), to each node of the ring in the desired order. Consider that, in this step, ”K1/K2
error” detection, by ”A, S & C application”, will occur on those Aggregates connected to the nodes
not provisioned yet, with the MS–SPRING protection ”Active”.
Verify, by ”A, S & C” at the end of provisioning update, that all the nodes of the ring are in ”Idle” state.
It is to be noticed that the provisioning order above showed as a), b), c), can be changed in b), a), c),
that is sending to the nodes of the ring, first, the ”Connections Configuration” files, then, in two separate
steps, ”Equipment Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= ENABLE” and ”Equipment Configuration” files
with ”MS–SPRING= ACTIVE”.
Deactivation Procedure:
d) provision the ”Equipment Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= DEACTIVE” to each node of the
ring. Consider that, in this step, ”K1/K2 error” detection, by ”A, S & C application”, will occur on those
Aggregates of the activated nodes connected to the node just provisioned.
e) Provision the ”Connections Configuration” files to each node of the ring, see para. 4.5.3 on page119.
f) provision the ”Equipment Configuration” files with ”MS–SPRING= DISABLE”, to each node of the
ring.
N.B. When the D/C IC connection is working on the NE for activate or deactivate the MS–SPRING
protection is necessary before execute the above procedure to change the D/C IC connection
as following:
Modify D/C IC connection into Drop/Insert unprotected when the Main side is set from the
Tributary. If the Main side is Pass Through, modify into AU4 Pass Through.
Send new configuration to the NE.
Execute the activation/deactivation phase of MS–SPRING procedure.
Restore the D/C IC connection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 93 / 436
436
4.5.2.5 APS configuration on Signal Degrade
The table shown in Figure 41. allows to enable or disable the activation of the APS protection in case of
Signal Degrade alarm.

Figure 41. Equipment Configuration – APS configuration on Signal Degrade
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 94 / 436
436
4.5.2.6 Optical Safety Configuration
The Table shown in Figure 42. contains the configuration parameters for the optical safety management
of each of the optical cards.
For each optical card the table allows:

• to select the ALS implemented option. If not selected (no cross inside the box) there is no need
to configure the next data.
• To define the ALS status after having implemented it, select one of the following values from
the list:
– Automatic Laser Shutdown enabled, or
– Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced ON (useful during tests) or
– Automatic Laser Shutdown disabled and Laser forced OFF (useful during maintenance
operation)
The latter two selections force the ABN condition.
• When ALS is enabled, to define the ALS procedure parameter by selecting one or both the
following values from the list:
– Automatic Restart Enabled
– Manual Restart Enabled

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 42. Equipment Configuration – Optical Safety
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 95 / 436
436
4.5.2.7 Bidirectional Transmission on single Fiber Configuration
This type of connection has been set up with passive optical couplers ( see Figure 43. )
The interruption of the optical fiber must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx.

To this concern and in general to avoid poor decoupling performance of the hybrid , an identification label

has been assigned to the local Tx an to the Rx one of the opposite side. ( ”1” given in the Figure 43. , from
Tx1 to Rx2)
Spare bits (1–4) of bite S1 are utilized by the Aggregate units.
The STM1 optical tributaries also use , as an alternative , byte MD1 ( Media Dependent byte on 2,2 RSOH
byte position) .
Tx Label : 1 Tx Label : 2
1 2
Tx Tx
1 2
OPTICAL OPTICAL
PASSIVE PASSIVE
COUPLER COUPLER
Rx Rx
1 2
Rx Label : 2 Rx Label : 1
1 2
Figure 43. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 96 / 436
436
Figure 44. illustrates the configuration concerning the Aggregate units and the STM1 tributaries:
• first column – select the transmit mode on the single fiber ( X on the chosen window).
•
second and third column – for the STM1 Trib. only.

Select, as alternative, the byte to use : M1 or S1
• fourth and fifth columns – label assignment to Rx and Tx, to be selected in the window on the
right of the screen.
Figure 44. Equipment Configuration – Bidirectional transmission on single fiber.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 97 / 436
436
4.5.2.8 Synchronous Source Selection
The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 46. on page 100,
Figure 47. on page 102 and Figure 48. on page 104. Specifically:

• ADM Type and Tributary Configuration
• Priority List Configuration
• SSM Value Configuration
The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synch. references within the ”Timing Marker”
function managing network synchronization.
This function allows to receive, select and transmit the synchronism reference inside the SDH network.
It also reconstructs the synchronism and automatically reroutes it should a failure arise on the
synchronization distribution network.
The first Z1 (S1) of the SDH frame is utilized as ”Synchronous Status Messages” vector (SSM).
The S1 byte information is managed by the ”Synchronous Status Messages Management” (SSMM)
function and is utilized by the equipment to implement the SSM Algorithm (SSMA).
This algorithm permits the selection of higher quality synchronism sources.
The Synchronization Equipment Timing Set architecture complies with ITU–T G.783.
Figure 45. on page 99 illustrates the synchronous source selection for single ADM.
In this figure, T1, T2 and T3 are the input reference signals from which the selection algorithm must choose
the timing references T0 and T4.
”T0” is the synch. reference signal for the NE, while T4 is utilized to synchronize other external equipment.
The SQUELCH function can be activated either on the basis of four settable quality threshold levels of the
signal, or through operator presetting.
The SQUELCH function is always enabled on the T1–T4 path, while it can be disabled on path T0–T4.
To activate the selection process, the following must be defined:
• the Allowable Synch. sources
• the Priority level assigned to each
• the Quality associated to the timing that does not carry the synchronization status message.
In this paragraph are defined the Allowable Timing References for a max of 6 prioritized inputs.
Selectors A and B (see Figure 45. on page99 ) have their own reference list with relevant priority.
Several inputs can have the same priority level. Therefore, a ”non revertive” switching mode is obtained
from these timing references.
The quality level of the SDH inputs is read through the SSMB.
During the configuration phase the operators assign the quality level of those inputs that are not SDH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s)or come from equipment not managing the SSMB.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 98 / 436
436
Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will be chosen.
Selection depends on the alarm indications associated to the reference signals.

If all the sources are disabled by the manager, the local oscillator will be activated as synchronism
reference.
Timing Reference might not be available for:
• alarms on the received reference signals
• the operator–driven LOCKOUT command
• the QL6 quality level (don’t use), only if the SSM algorithm is active and not applicable when
the criteria based on Priority is active.
During the configuration phase the byte S1 management might be disabled. In this case the priority–based
algorithm is utilized.
T4 EXTERNAL
Squelch
Select Select REFERENCE
A C
Squelch
INPUTS:
T1 T0
(STM–N) NE TIMING
T2 Select
(2Mbit/s) B SETG
T3 REFERENCE
(2MHz)
INTERNAL
OSC.
Figure 45. Equipment Configuration – Sync. Source Selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 99 / 436
436
4.5.2.8.1 Synchronization. ADM Type & Tributary Configuration
This table ( see Figure 46. ) allows:

To configure the equipment type for the Timing Marker management. The user can choose the

equipment type from the list on the right of the screen named ”Equipment Type”.
The possible selections are:
– Single ADM
– ADM with SSU (when an external SSU Equipment is connected to filter the Clock signal)
• to configure (if ”ADM with SSU” has been already selected”) the quality level for the ”ADM with
SSU” equipment type from a list named ”SSU Quality” displayed on the right of the screen.
The user can select the following values from the list named ”SSU Quality”:
– G.812T
– G.812L
– G.81s
– None
• to select a clock source coming from the tributary cards.
For each main tributary the user can select:
– the clock sources from a list named ”Tributary Reference” displayed on the right of the
screen. The possible tributary clock sources are the STM1 tributaries, the 21x2Mb
tributaries and the 34/2 & 5x2Mb Tributaries. For the 21x2Mb tributary sources the user
can select one of the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s ports. For the 34/2 & 5x2Mb tributary sources,
the user can select one of the five 2 Mb ports.
– the mode from a list named ”Mode” displayed on the right of the screen only is he has
chosen the 21x2M Tributary as clock source. The possible modes are: Not Used, Not
Framed, PCM, PCM CRC4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 46. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – ADM Type and Trib. Config.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 100 / 436
436
4.5.2.8.2 Synchronization: Priority List Configuration
This table (see Figure 47. on page 102) defines the synchronization parameters for an equipment
configured as Single ADM or ADM with SSU. The table allows the user:
• To enable/disable ”T0–T4” selection for the External synchronization
– T0: clock supplied to the equipment. T4: external clock
• to configure six clock references for the External/Internal synchronization, and for each of them
the user can select:
– the clock source from a list named ”Reference Type” displayed on the right of the screen.
The possible values are:
D Not Used
D 2 MHz A
D 2 MHz B
D Aggregate STM4 West 1
D Aggregate STM16 West
D Aggregate STM4 East 1
D Aggregate STM16 East
D Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
– the priority level from a list named ”Priority Level” displayed on the right of the screen.
The possible values are:
D 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and None
• to enable/disable the SSM algorithm for the External/Internal synchronization
– a priority based selection is performed when the algorithm is disabled
N.B. If T0 is utilized to supply T4 towards the outside of the equipment, the operator must not fill–in
selection table ”External Synchronization”.
When SSU is present , ”T0” must be set different from ”T4”.
• to select the T1/T4 Squelch criteria from a list named ”Squelch Criteria” displayed on the right
of the screen. The possible values are:
– Threshold G.811
– Threshold G.812T
– Threshold G.812L
– Threshold G.81s
• to select and enable/disable the T0/T4 Squelch Criteria from the list named ”Squelch Criteria”
displayed on the right of the screen. The possible values are as those described fro the T1/T4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Squelch Criteria.
• to enable/disable the Force Squelch.

In this case the external clock T4 will be inhibited.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 101 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 47. Equipment Configuration – Synch. – Priority List Config.
102 / 436
4.5.2.8.3 Synchronization: SSM Value Configuration
This table (see Figure 48. on page 104 ) defines the management of the SSM bytes in both Reception (see
2nd column), and Transmission (see 3rd column). For the Reference signals see 1st column.
In Reception and in Transmission, the table allows (only for the Single ADM, the case of ADM with SSU
being already defined in Figure 46. on page 100 ) for each Aggregate and Tributary clock reference, to
choose the quality value to supply to the Selection Algorithm, chosen from a list named ”Quality Level”
displayed on the right of the screen (only in reception for the 2MHz A and 2 MHz B clock references).
The user can select, for each port, the following values from the list named ”Quality Level” for both the
management of the ”Rx SSM Byte” and ”Tx SSM Byte”:
• Rx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Rx Quality Level:
– Extracted
– Threshold G.811
– Threshold G.81s
– Q. Unknown
– Don’t Use
Setting the ”Extracted” quality level on the single port enables the termination of Byte S1 received on the
STM–N Aggregates or Tributaries coming from the equipment managing the Byte.
The selection algorithm will choose from the six Rx signals that to use as timing reference for the
equipment.
Choosing a Quality Level other than the ”Extracted” one means that the relevant signal will be sent to the
selection algorithm with this set Q.L..
This presetting operation is optional for the STM–N signals, but is mandatory for the 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz
signals.
• Tx SSM Byte
The user can select the following from the Tx Quality Level:
– Insert
– Threshold G.811
– Threshold G.81s
– Q.Unknown
– Don’t Use
Setting the ”Insert” criteria on the single port the operator enables to transmit on the output signal the
Quality Level selected with the algorithm .
A chosen Q.L. other than ”Insert” is preset when wanting to transmit a fixed Q.L. preset value whatever
it is the Q.L. of the reference signal selected with the algorithm.
This modality applies only to STM–N signals assigned to the equipment managing Byte S1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 103 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 48. Equipment Configuration– Synch. – SSM Value Configuration
104 / 436
4.5.2.9 BER Threshold Configuration
The BER THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION table shown in Figure 49. indicates information on the
ACTIVATION and DEACTIVATION thresholds of B2 Signal Degrade.
The application defines the activation/deactivation threshold values selected by the user and the default
values.
The Signal Degrade alarm values are 10–5, 10–6, 10–7, 10–8, 10–9 (for activation), 10–6, 10–7, 10–8, 10–9,
10–10 (for deactivation). The normal values for activation/de–activation are 10–5/ 10–6.
Figure 49. Equipment Configuration – BER Threshold
4.5.2.10 Consequent Actions
The table shown in Figure 50. allows to enable or disable the consequent actions for the B2 Excessive
BER alarm of the Aggregate and STM1 Tributary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 50. Equipment Configuration – Consequent actions
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 105 / 436
436
4.5.2.11 G.784 BBE Thresholds configuration
The table shown in Figure 51. allows to configure the BBE (Background Block Errors detected on the
Parity Bytes) thresholds values of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over

a one day period. For the 15 minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For

STM–n flows it is possible to declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
BBE – STM16 RS (B1)

BBE – STM16 MS (B2)
BBE – VC4 (B3)
BBE – VC3 (B3)
BBE – VC12 (BIP2)
The Operation System is informed on the results.
Figure 51. indicates the default values within the range defined by ITU–T Rec. G.784.
When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights
the labels ”15 M TCA” or ”DAY TCA” on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Control
application.
15 M TCA lights on when exceeding the High Threshold and lights off when decreasing below the Low
Threshold.
To activate the counters it is necessary to ”start” the Terminal Points in the Performance Monitoring
application (see para 4.8.4 on page 285).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. Equipment Configuration – G.784 BBE Thresholds
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 106 / 436
436
4.5.2.12 G.784 ES Thresholds configuration
The table Figure 52. shown in allows to configure the ES (Errored seconds) thresholds values of the
Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15 minutes
period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STM–n flows it is possible declare the
Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
ES – STM16 RS (B1)
ES – STM16 MS (B2)
ES – STM4 RS (B1)
ES – STM4 MS (B2)
ES – STM1 RS (B1)
ES – STM1 MS (B2)
ES – VC4 (B3)
ES – VC3 (B3)
ES – VC12 (BIP2)
When exceeding the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights
the labels ”15 M TCA” and DAY TCA on the corresponding tributary in the Alarm Status & Control
application.
Threshold.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. Equipment Configuration – G.784 ES Thresholds
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 107 / 436
436
4.5.2.13 G.784 SES Thresholds configuration
The table shown in Figure 53. allows to configure the SES (Severely Errored seconds) thresholds values
of the Performance Monitoring counters over a 15 minutes period and over a one day period. For the 15

minutes period, it is possible to configure a low and a high threshold. For STM–n flows it is possible to

declare the Multiplex Section or the Regeneration Section thresholds.
SES – STM16 RS (B1)

SES – STM16 MS (B2)
SES – VC4 (B3)
SES – VC3 (B3)
SES – VC12 (BIP2)
When exceed the selected threshold value , the event is stored in the Maintenance Memory and lights the
labels ”15 M TCA” and ”DAY TCA” on the corresponding tributary and of the UT label in the Alarm Status
& Control application.
Threshold.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 53. Equipment Configuration – G.784 SES Thresholds
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 108 / 436
436
4.5.2.14 G.784 Performance points configuration
From the table shown in Figure 54. is selected, for each STM4 or STM16 Aggregate, the AU channel for
the PJC/B3 performance point.
Clicking on the circle in one of the unit presented, the operator can select from the list of AU4 displayed
on the right of the screen.
The selected AU4 will appear next to the circle.
This AU4 will be checked to verify the quality of the network synchronization and of the VC4 payload in
the G 784 Performance Monitoring.
Figure 54. Equipment Configuration – G.784 Performance Points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 109 / 436
436
4.5.2.15 Alarm Criteria
The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as:

Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative / Disabled

Figure 55. and Figure 56. illustrate two examples of the various selections for each unit.
Figure 55. Equipment Configuration – Equipment Alarm criteria

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 56. Equipment Configuration – STM4 Aggregate Alarm criteria
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 110 / 436
436
4.5.2.16 Office alarms delay facility configuration
The screen of Figure 57. allows to select the ”Filter period” for the activation of the following remote
alarms:
• URG, which is the OR’ing of the urgent alarms occurred in the NE,
• NURG, which is the OR’ing of the not urgent alarms occurred in the NE.
For each ”remote alarm” the application displays a string specifying the alarm, and a small circle. Clicking
on the circle, the user can select the alarm filter period from a list displayed on the right of the screen.
The periods are expressed in seconds and the default value is 10.
Figure 57. Equipment Configuration – Office alarms delay configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 111 / 436
436
4.5.2.17 Housekeeping alarm indication configuration
The table shown in Figure 58. allows to define the HOUSEKEEPING signal received from the external

– Housekeeping 1,2,3, can be defined by the operator according to the type of alarm/signal connected

(default CP1, CP2, CP3).
– Housekeeping 4 is devoted to alarm of the external Synchronous Supply unit.
– Housekeeping 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms (URG / ABN / NURG) of external Optical Fiber
Amplifier
– Housekeeping 8 is assigned to the AND BATT EXT (Optical Fiber Amplifier station power supply
alarm) or for the DROP SHELF the AND BATT ALARM.
Housekeeping 4 to 8 cannot be modified

For Housekeeping 1, 2, 3, 4 and 8, the alarm criterion can be selected as indicated in para 4.5.2.15.
on page 110.
These alarms are so managed by the control function.
N.B. The Housekeeping 1,2,3 string label can have 16 characters Max.
Figure 58. Equipment Configuration – Housekeeping assignment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 112 / 436
436
4.5.2.18 Drop Shelf – Subrack Configuration
The SUBRACK CONFIGURATION table, displayed as in Figure 59. permits to configure each of the
cards in the slots of the Drop Shelf .
Each slot is represented by a rectangle which in turn displays the following elements:
• slot number – identifies its position in the subrack physical configuration
• slot name – identifies the type of card to be inserted into the slot
• small circle and associated string defining card insertion into the slot.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select from the list shown in the middle
of the screen. The selected option is displayed next to the circle. Displaying after a
selection is applicable to all the configuration screens.
The options for the OH Interface Unit (slot 1 ) are not selectable in this release:
• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for Tributaries (slots 2, 3, 4, 5 , 6 , 7 12, 13, 14 ), are:

• 21x2Mb Tributary (or 21x2 M Trib with retiming)
• Unassigned Card
The selectable option for Trib. spare , (slots 11), is:

• 21x2 M Trib.
The options for Switch Unit, (slot 10 ) are not selectable in this release :
• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for ADM 600 Interface (slots 8, 9 ) :

• Assigned Card
• Unassigned Card
The selectable options for STM – 1 E Modules (slots M1, M2. M3 ):

• Assigned Card
• Unassigned Card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf,subrack configuration
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 113 / 436
436
4.5.2.19 Drop Shelf – Power Supply Configuration
The table shown in Figure 60. ,defines the availability of each of the two converters installed on the
extension subrack.

Each converter is represented by a small box and by a string indicating the converter’s name.

By clicking on the box or on the string, a cross (X) will appear inside it to define the converter as ”Assigned”.
Click again to remove the cross.
This selection operation is applicable to all the configuration screens.
Figure 60. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, Power Supply

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 114 / 436
436
4.5.2.20 Drop Shelf – EPS/APS Configuration
The table shown in Figure 61. on page 116 permits to select the protections available in the D.S. extension.
The EPS/APS protection functions are generally speaking described in the Technical Handbook.
While selecting the options are listed on the right of the screen.
The different units are selected as follows:
• ADM 600 A
– Type of Protection
D None
D EPS
D Unset
– Protection Mode
D Unset
D Revertive: After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored
(Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.
D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition

Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 secs) when the revertive mode has been
• Tributary units (1 to 9)
D None
D EPS (for electrical tributary)
D N+1 (1 spare for N main).
– Protection priority
D Unset
D Default. Only possible for N+1. The sequence priority is 1–> 2–>3–>4...–>8–>9.
– Protection operation
D Unset
– Protection Mode
D Unset
D Revertive. After protection intervention, the initial condition is restored
(Main Working) when the unit alarm disappears.
D Not Revertive: The Spare works even if Main returns to normal condition.
With the N+1 EPS protection the Protection Mode should be always Revertive.
– Wait time to Restore

Select the waiting time to Revert (0 to 900 secs) when the revertive mode has been
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 115 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 61. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, EPS/APS
116 / 436
4.5.2.21 Drop Shelf – Synchronization: Tributary Configuration
The configuration tables defining the Synch. parameters are shown in Figure 62. Specifically:
•
ADM 600 Interface (A /B ) and Tributary Configuration

The tables are used to preset the selection criteria for the synchronous references within the ”Timing
Marker” function managing network synchronization.
For each main tributary the user can select:
– the reference Tributary from a list named ”Tributary Number” displayed on the top right
of the screen.
– the clock sources from a list named ”Tributary Reference” displayed on the right of the
screen. The possible tributary clock sources are the 21x2Mb tributaries .
For these the user can select one of the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s ports.
– the mode from a list named ”Mode” displayed on the right of the screen .
The possible modes are: Not Used, Not Framed, PCM, PCM CRC4
Figure 62. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, synchronization:tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 117 / 436
436
4.5.2.22 Drop Shelf – Alarm criterion Configuration
The alarms detected on the Units can be classified as:

Urgent / Not Urgent / Indicative / Disabled

Figure 63. illustrates an example of the various selections for the ADM 600 I/F unit.
Figure 63. Equipment Configuration – Drop Shelf, alarm criterion

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 118 / 436
436
4.5.3 Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application
The following is a list of the connection configuration with Full Matrix Tables available (see Figure 64. on
page 120).
For LINE SHELF Connection Configuration:
• ENHANCED CONNECTIVITY
• WEST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE
• EAST AGGREGATE PAYLOAD STRUCTURE
• TRIBUTARY PAYLOAD STRUCTURE
• SIGNAL LABEL FOR AGGREGATE VC4
• SIGNAL LABEL FOR TRIBUTARY CARDS
• AU–4’s DROP/INSERT ALLOCATION
• 140M TRIBUTARY PORT CONFIGURATION
• SQUELCHING TABLE FOR EAST HO CONTAINERS
• SQUELCHING TABLE FOR WEST HO CONTAINERS
• SQUELCHING TABLE FOR TERMINATED LO CONTAINERS (not operative)
• AU–4’s CROSS–CONNECTION FOR AGGREGATES
• AU–4’s CROSS–CONNECTION FOR TRIBUTARIES
• AU–4’s PASS–THROUGH ALLOCATION
• TU’s D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3

• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• TU’s D/I ALLOCATION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU4–1 TUG3

• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. WEST AU4–16 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU4–1 TUG3

• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION AGG. EAST AU4–16 TUG3
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 1 TUG3

• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ” ”
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION TRIBUTARY 8 TUG3
• 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION
• 34M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION (and 45M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION)
• 2/34 CONDITIONS OF 34/2 AND 5X2M TRIB. #1 TO #3
• TU’s PASS–THROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU4–1 TUG3

• ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ”
• ” ” ” ” ” ”
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TU’s PASS–THROUGH FOR AGG. EAST AU4–16 TUG3
• CONNECTIONS CONFIGURATION by AUX/EOW
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 119 / 436
436
For the DROP SHELF Connection Configuration:
• STM 1 E MODULES CONNECTION

TU’s D / I ALLOCATION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 8

• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 8
• 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
Figure 64. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Tables
4.5.3.1 General information un Connection Configuration
Hereinafter are briefly described some of the parameters indicated in the configuration tables:
• TU’s allocation inside the AU4 structure (see para 4.5.3.1.1 on page 121)
• Definition of the connection traffic (see para 4.5.3.1.2 on page 122)
• Connection possibilities (see para 4.5.3.1.3 on page 134)
• MS SPRING connection advices (see para 4.5.3.1.4 on page 135)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 120 / 436
436
4.5.3.1.1 TU’s allocation inside the AU4 structure
• TU12 Allocation
The sixty–three TU12’s of the STM frame are located through:

– TUG3 (1, 2, 3)
TUG2 (1, 2 ... 6,7)
VC12 (1, 2, 3)
Therefore, each TU12 is located through a sequence of three numbers e.g., 1, 7, 2) where the 1st number
indicates the TUG3, the 2nd the TUG2, the 3rd the VC12.
Table 8. states TU’s relationship.
• TU3 Allocation
With regard to TU3 (1–3) allocation inside the frame use is made of the relevant TUG3.
– TUG3 (1, 2, 3)
Table 8. TU12 Allocation
TUG 3 TUG 2 VC 12 TU12 (1–63)

1st Number 2nd Number 3rd Number Position in the frame
1 1 1 1
2 1 1 2
3 1 1 3
1 2 1 4
2 2 1 5
3 2 1 6
1 3 1 7
2 3 1 8
3 3 1 9
. . . .
. . . .
1 7 3 61
2 7 3 62
3 7 3 63
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 121 / 436
436
4.5.3.1.2 Definition of the connection traffic
The main type of connection are:

Drop/Insert

Terminated connections between tributaries and Aggregates (Trib. to Agg.)
• Pass–Through
Connection between Aggregate west and Aggregates East (Agg. to Agg.)
• Cross Connection
Connections within the Aggregate of one side or between tributaries (Trib. to Trib. or AGG. to AGG.)
This connection are possible only with FULL MATRIX unit.
• Drop and Continue
Unidirectional pass–through, protected drop, insert in one direction are simultaneously allowed.
• Mixed configuration of previous connections
All the previous connections are possible on:
– AU–4
can be referred to tributaries (140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or STM1) or Aggregate
– TU
can be referred to:
– plesiochronous tributaries 2 Mbit/s (TU–12) or 34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s (TU–3)
– STM–1 tributaries structured with TU–12 or TU–3.
– Aggregate
The VC4 Matrix (Connection Card unit) cannot be utilized to perform the TU’s connections nor for any kind
of Cross Connection.
By utilizing the Full Matrix all the streams can be managed.
For each type of main connection is listed the available mode. In order to simplify the figure the MATRIX
is not indicated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 122 / 436
436
• Drop/Insert
– Insert to West (or East) (see Figure 65. )

The selected TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary to only one of the Aggregate
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 65. Insert to East
– Bridge (see Figure 66. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates.
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 66. Bridge

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 123 / 436
436
– Drop unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 67. )
The selected TU/AU is received from only one Aggregate.

WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 67. Drop unprotected, East
– Drop protected West (or East) (see Figure 68. )
The selected TU/AU is received from one side Aggregate. When this side is out of service,
the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite side Aggregate.
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 68. Drop protected, East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 124 / 436
436
– Drop/insert bidirectional unprotected West (or East) (see Figure 69. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted and received by only one side Aggregate
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 69. Drop/Insert bidirectional unprotected, East
– Drop/insert protected West (or East) (see Figure 70. )
The selected TU/AU is transmitted to both side Aggregates and received from the selected
side Aggregate. When this side is out of service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite
side Aggregate
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 70. Drop/Insert protected, East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 125 / 436
436
• Pass–through (see Figure 71. )
With regard to pass–through traffic the same TU/AU can be used for both directions, i.e.,
West to East, East to West).

Both modes can be selected, therefore, a bidirectional channel can be obtained by

selecting both modes using the same TU/AU.
The following modes can be distinguished:
• West to East
• East to West
Reference is made to the TU/AU accessing the East Aggregate
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx PASS THROUGH
WEST TO EAST
Tx Rx PASS THROUGH
EAST TO WEST
BIDIRECTIONAL
WEST 1 EAST 1
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx PASS THROUGH
Rx WEST TO EAST
WEST 2 EAST 2
Rx Tx
PASS THROUGH
Tx Rx EAST TO WEST
UNIDIRECTIONALS
Figure 71. Pass–through

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 126 / 436
436
• Cross–connection
– Cross connection between tributaries

With this type of traffic a TU/AU is connected between tributaries, without connection with
Aggregates.
The following mode can be distinguished:
∆ Unidirectional
The TU/AU is transmitted from the tributary indicated to the selected TU/AU tributary
(Figure 72. )
∆ Bidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted/received between the tributary indicated and the selected

TU/AU tributary (Figure 73. )
INDICATED SELECTED
TU/AU TU/AU
TRIB. TRIB.
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Figure 72. Unidirectional. Trib. Cross Connection
INDICATED SELECTED
TU/AU TU/AU
TRIB. TRIB.
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Figure 73. Bidirectional–Trib. Cross Connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 127 / 436
436
– Cross connection between TU/AU of the same side Aggregate
With this type of traffic the TU/AU is not connected with tributaries or opposite side
Aggregate.

The following mode can be distinguished :
– ∆ Unidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted to another TU/AU of the same side Aggregate (see Figure 74. )
– ∆ Bidirectional
A TU/AU is transmitted/received between TU/AU indicated and the TU/AU selected of the
same side Aggregate (see Figure 75. )
WEST INDICATED TU/AU

Rx
AGG.
WEST
Tx
SELECTED TU/AU
Figure 74. Unidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection
WEST INDICATED TU/AU
Rx
Tx
AGG.
WEST
Rx
Tx
SELECTED TU/AU
Figure 75. Bidirectional West Agg. Cross Connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 128 / 436
436
• Drop and Continue for SNC/P (PPS)
The allowed selections are:

D/C W INS W
D/C E INS W
D/C E INS E
D/C W INS E
D/C stands for Drop and Continue
The letter that follows (W=West, E=East) indicates the ”drop protected” side ( e.g., W
means West main, and East spare side).
The last indication (INS E or INS W) indicates the ”insert” side.
The ”unidirectional pass–through” is always in the direction opposite to that of the ”insert”
side, e.g. when ”INS E”, the pass–through is from East to West.
– D/C W INS W ( see Figure 76. )
The selected TU/AU is simultaneously:
∆ Drop–protected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side is
out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate.
∆ Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 76. Drop and Continue West and Insert West

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 129 / 436
436
– D/C E INS W (see Figure 77. )

Drop–protected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is

out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate.
∆ Insert West, transmitted from the tributary to the West side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the West to the East side (unidirectional)
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 77. Drop and Continue East and Insert West
– D/C E INS E (see Figure 78. )
∆ Drop–protected East, received from the East side Aggregate. When this side is
out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite West side Aggregate.
∆ Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 78. Drop and Continue East and Insert East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 130 / 436
436
– D/C W INS E (see Figure 79. )
∆
Drop–protected West, received from the West side Aggregate. When this side is
out–of–service, the TU/AU is dropped from the opposite East side Aggregate.
∆ Insert East, transmitted from the tributary to the East side Aggregate
∆ Pass–through from the East to the West side (unidirectional)
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 79. Drop and Continue West and Insert East

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 131 / 436
436
• Drop and Continue Interconnection

It is used in case of interworking between SNCP – MS SPRING or MS SPRING – MS SPRING or SNCP

– SNCP, to protect the 8 main AU4s.
The allowed selections are:
D/C IC W
D/C IC E
D/C IC PASS THROUGH W

D/C IC PASS THROUGH E
– The acronym” D/C IC W (E)” means:
• D/C: DROP and CONTINUE

RX signal : DROP towards the tributary and CONTINUE towards opposite side
• IC W (E): INTERCONNECTION West (or East)
TX side: INSERT towards TX West (or East) selected between the incoming
tributary (MAIN) or the PASS THROUGH received from the opposite LINE side
(PROTECTION).
– The acronym” D/C IC PASS THROUGH W (E)” indicates that the main side is not from
the Tributary like the previous case but from the Aggregate Line side and the protection
is realized by the Tributary.
N.B. If one of the previous cited D/C IC connections is applied on a NE inserted in a ring not MS
SPRING protected, only the first 8 AU4s of the STM 16 frame are available.
WEST AGGREGATES EAST

Rx
Tx
(*)
Rx Tx
TRIBUTARY
(*) SS= Service

Selector Tx Rx
Figure 80. MS SPRING – Drop and Continue Interconnection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 132 / 436
436
• Mixed Connection
To realize this connection the operator must correctly set different connection tables
– Broadcasting: Drop + Pass through (see Figure 81. )

The TU/AU received from one Aggregate side is simultaneously dropped towards the
tributary side and sent in pass–through toward the opposite Aggregate side. One tributary
only (in one station) can also insert the proper signal.
– Tributary insert + cross–connection (see Figure 82. )
The TU/AU of one tributary can be simultaneously sent towards Aggregate (also both
sides) and toward other tributary TU/AU (cross–connection).
One of the two connections can use both directions (drop/insert for Aggregates side
bidirectional for cross connection)
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 81. Broadcasting, Drop + Pass Through
WEST EAST
Rx AGGREGATES Tx
Tx Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Figure 82. Tributary insert + cross–connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 133 / 436
436
4.5.3.1.3 Connection Possibilities
• STM–4 Aggregate

There are no connection limits: four AU4 West side and four AU4 East side can be utilized.

When PPS is used, the same AU/TU is present on both West and East sides.
Obviously streams employed for a connection type cannot be utilized in other not coherent
selection (for example: add/drop and bidirectional pass–through of the same AU/TU).
• STM–16 Aggregate
Each STM16 West and East Aggregate is organized with 16 AU4.

No limits are present for AU4 pass–through (max 16 AU4).
For other connections eight MAX AU4 can be utilized, as alternative.

These AU4 can be subdivided among the different connection types and, besides not
exceeding the max permitted number, must not be selected in a not coherent way on the same
AU4.
The connection possibilities and the relevant max number of AU4 that can be utilized are:
• TU pass–through: a max. of four AU4 East and four AU4 West
• TU/AU Aggregate Cross–Connection: a max of eight AU4 (West East)
• Add/Drop:
– AU4 without SNCP: max 8, East + West
– AU4 with SNCP: max 8 East or West, protected on other side
– AU4 containing TU12/TU3 with PPS: max 4, East or West, protected on other side.
The TU both in add/drop protected (SNCP) and in pass–through utilize a pair of AU4 (with the same
number).
If, for example, add/drop protected TU’s are realized by using 1 AU4, the AU4 on the opposite side (with
same number) will also be utilized.
So only 6 AU4 will be available for the previous type of connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 134 / 436
436
4.5.3.1.4 MS SPRING connection configuration advices
The following suggestions must be considered in the MS SPRING connection configuration:
•
SNCP connections cannot be installed in a MS–SPRING network. This leads to an unprotected

connections installation.
• Enhanced Connectivity AU4s is not allowed when MS SPRING protection is running. Only TUs
unprotected connections must be considered.
• AU4s from #9 to #16 don’t have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter
of ”Connections configuration” provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to #8 must be used and
configured for paths installation.
• AU4 permutation ( change of AU4 allocation ) is not allowed in ”AU4 pass–through connections”
( HVC connections ). The AU4 allocated to pass–through in HVC connections, must be the
same through the node, while AU4 permutation in TU pass–through (LVC connections) is
allowed.
• AU4/TU cross–connection Aggregate side, that is paths received from Aggregate line and
looped–back to the ( same ) Aggregate line, are not allowed.
• Follow the indication of para 4.5.3.9 on page 145 in order to define, in the same step, the
”Squelching Table HO” for East and for West aggregates describing, for each connection
installed, as Source Node, the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4
and as Destination Node, the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 135 / 436
436
4.5.3.2 Enhanced Connectivity
The Figure 83. allows the user to define, only for 1661SM–C equipment, the configuration parameters
concerning the ” Enhanced Connectivity ” function on the aggregate AU4’s .

This function allows to select structured AU4s and connect them in Enhanced connectivity. Thanks
to this facility it is possible to PPS protect up to 8 AU4s TUG structured streams. The structured AU4
connected in Enhanced Connectivity can hosts TU 12 and TU3 structures. No mixed set and connection
modes are allowed. These AU4 must be TU12 or TU3 structured, and the connection mode must be the
same for all the pertaining TUs . The protection works at ” server layer” level and therefor it switches when
AU AIS, AU LOP, EXBER (B3) arise. The switch for the AU4 declared in Enhanced connectivity doesn’t
operate if the single contained TU is alarmed, but only for alarms relevant to the AU.
For the AU4s not wholly TU12 or TU3 managed or with different connection modes, the limit of AU4
number that can be PPS protected is always up to 4.
Each of the 16 aggregate AU4’s (1st column) is settable by:
• 2nd column – the small box allows to enable / disable the ” Enhanced Connectivity ” function
on the AU4. Clicking on the box the symbol ”X” is displayed on the box; this symbol enables the
”Enhanced Connectivity” function. Clicking it again the symbol ”X”is removed from the box and
the ”Enhanced Connectivity” function” is disabled.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string allows to configure the connection mode.
By clicking on the circle the user can select from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.
When the table is shown the default option (”None” ) is displayed near the circle.
The user can select the mode of connection from the list:
– None
– Bridge (Insert to both)
– Drop from East protected (SNCP)
– Drop from West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert East protected (SNCP)
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS W

Drop protected West, Pass–through W to E, Insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E to W

Drop Protected East, Pass–Through W to E, insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E INS

Drop Protected East, Pass–Through to Insert East
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS E

Drop Protected West, Pass–Through E to W, Insert East
• 4th column – a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertive mode
PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)
is performed in not Revertive mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 136 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 83. Connection configuration with Full Matrix – Enhanced Connectivity
137 / 436
4.5.3.3 Aggregate Payload Structure
The data indicated in Figure 84. defines the payload structure for aggregate AU–4’s, West.
The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Aggregate AU–4 by selecting the

options.

When selecting the ”structured” option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG–3 inside the
payload.
Each AU–4 is represented by:
• a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circle
the user can choose the following option from the list:
– Not structured
– structured
• a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three ”structured” frame
TUG–3’s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG–3
from the list displayed at the bottom–left of the screen. The selected value is displayed next to
the associated circle.
The possible value to select are:
– TUG2
– TU3
The selections must comply with the ”Signal Label for Aggregate VC4 Table”.
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM–16 Aggregate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 84. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – West Agg. Payload structure
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 138 / 436
436
4.5.3.4 Tributary Payload Structure
The data indicated in Figure 85. defines the payload structure for the eight Tributary cards.
The application allows to configure the frame composition for each Tributary card by selecting the relevant
options.
When selecting the ”Structured” option the user can choose the composition of the 3 TUG–3 inside the
payload.
Each card is represented by:
• a small circle on the left that allows to select the frame composition. By clicking on the circle the
user can choose the following option from the list:
– Not structured
– structured
• a group of three small circles that allow to select the composition of three ”structured” frame
TUG–3’s. By clicking on each circle the user can select the value for the associated TUG–3 from
the list displayed at the bottom–left of the screen.
The possible values to select are:
– TUG2
– TU3
If the Drop Shelf is used, the Line Shelf Trib # 5,6,7 Tributary Payload Structure , must be declared as
TUG 2 structured.
The selections must comply with the ”Signal Label for Tributary card Table”.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 85. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Tributary payload structure
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 139 / 436
436
4.5.3.5 Signal Label for Aggregate VC4
The table shown in Figure 86. indicates information on the signal label ”to be compared” (Rx side) and
the signal label ”to be transmitted” (Tx side) of the Aggregate VC4.

For each VC4 (1 to 16) of the West and East Aggregate the application allows to configure a couple of

signal labels, and displays.
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be compared”
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be transmitted”.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on the
right of the screen:
• Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si not
carrying a pay load).
• Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all type
of pay load structures are accepted).
• TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUG
selection). For all the other cases selections are not operative.
Figure 86. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Signal label Agg. VC4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 140 / 436
436
4.5.3.6 Signal Label for Tributary cards
The table shown in Figure 87. indicates information on the signal label ”to be compared” (Rx side) and
the signal label ”to be transmitted” (Tx side) of the tributary units.
For each Tributary units the application allows to configure a couple of signal labels, and displays:
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be compared”
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal label ”to be transmitted”.
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the table on the
right of the screen.
For the connection with Full Matrix the table defines the VC4 signal labels belonging to the STM1
Tributaries (8 tributaries access, only for STM1 signals).
The possible signal labels are:
• Unequipped (the VC4 informative contents must not be taken into consideration, it si not
carrying a pay load).
• Equipped not specified ( the VC4 is managed whichever structured or not structured; all type
of pay load structures are accepted).
• TUG structure (if equipped with 2 Mbit/s, 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tribs. and 34/2 5x2Mbit/s Tribs.).
The cited selections must be realized only if the signals have been structured (through TUG
selection). For all the other cases selections are not operative.
For the 140M Tributaries, 21X2 M Tributaries, 5X2M Tributaries 3 x 45M Tributaries and 3X34 Mbit/s
Tributaries units the possible VC4/VC12/VC3 signal labels are:
• Unequipped
• Equipped not specified
• Asynchronous
For the tributaries used the value to fix is Asynchronous.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 87. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. Signal label for trib.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 141 / 436
436
4.5.3.7 AU–4’s Drop/Insert Allocation
The data indicated in Figure 88. on page 143 allows the user:

to configure the connections between the 140M/STM1 Electrical and STM1 Optical Tributary

units and the Aggregate AU–4’s.
• to configure the connection types towards the Aggregate AU–4’s.
Each Tributary (1st. column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4
to which the Tributary card will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
can select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of
connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list displayed
at the bottom–right of the screen.
The user can select the following types of connections from the list:
– None
– Insert To West
– Insert to East
– Drop from West not protected
– Drop from East not protected
– Drop from East protected (SNCP)
– Drop from West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert West bidirectional not protected
– Drop/Insert East bidirectional not protected
– Drop/Insert West protected (SNCP)
– Drop/Insert East protected (SNCP)
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS W. ( For the D/C the Main side is kept from the Trib.)
Drop protected West, Pass–through W to E, Insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E to W
Drop Protected East, Pass–Through W to E, insert West
– Drop and Continue D/C E INS
Drop Protected East, Pass–Through to Insert East
– Drop and Continue D/C W INS E
Drop Protected West, Pass–Through E to W, Insert East
– Drop and Continue D/C IC W or E
Drop from W and Continue toward E, Insert W and pass through connection E to W.
– Drop and Continue D/C IC Pass–Through W or E. This facility can be used in SNCP,
MS–SPRING interworking to protect the 8 main AU4. The Main side is kept from the
Aggregate Line side.
• 4th column – a cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertible mode
PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR ( 5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)
is performed in not Revertible mode.
Attention !
The selections on this screen are operative when the AU–4 payloads have been selected as NOT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
STRUCTURED
AU4 5 to 16 can be used for the STM–16 Aggregates only.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 142 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 88. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix AU4 drop/insert
143 / 436
4.5.3.8 140Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
The table shown in Figure 89. allows to enable or disable each of the eight possible 140Mbit/s port of the
relevant Tributary units.

Figure 89. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 140 Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 144 / 436
436
4.5.3.9 Squelching table for EAST and WEST HO container
The Figure 90. on page 146 shows how the user can configure the Squelching table for 8 High Priority
HO containers of the Aggregate East in TX and in RX direction ; a similar screen is available for the West
HO containers.
This table must be configured when a ring network made of 1661SM–C equipment is managed with a MS
SPRING protection. The target of the Squelching Function is to avoid misconnections in case a Node on
which we had Inserted and Dropped an High Priority stream, remains isolated as a consequence of a
double failure, one before and another after it . In fact in this case all streams directed to and dropped from
this node, are definitively lost and it cannot be recovered.
Nevertheless, following the MS SPRING rules, the protection algorithm trays to recover the connection
interrupted by the double failure. Both adjacent Nodes should route the interrupted stream into the relevant
Low Priority AU4 stream changing the previously defined connection.
To avoid that misconnection the Squelching Function inserts the AIS criterion into the Low Priority AU4,
relevant to that stream that should have been Inserted and Dropped in /from the isolated Node. In this way
the use of the Low priority AU4 to recover the connection becomes impossible.
All Nodes have been identified with a progressive number filling the relevant table in the Equipment
Configuration Application (para. 4.5.2.4 on page 92) in order to describe the Node succession in the Ring.
For the High Priority AU4 streams the user is request to set the Node (number) into which they are
GENERATED ( SOURCE NODE ) and the Node from which they are TERMINATED ( DESTINATION
NODE).
The High Priority AU4 stream is GENERATED in a node when either it is inserted (”AU4 Insert” or ”TU12/3
Insert” Connection Mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured, a ”TU 12/3 Pass Through” connection mode
is implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated as SOURCE NODE
in ” HO Squelching Table”.
Notice that a AU4 not structured in ”AU4 Pass through” connection mode is never generated by the
passed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated as SOURCE
NODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.
Similarly, the High Priority AU4 stream is TERMINATED in a node when either it is dropped (”AU4 Drop”
or ”TU12/3 Drop” connection mode) or when, in case of AU4 structured a TU12/3 pass through connection
mode is implemented in that node. Then in both cases the node involved must be indicated as
DESTINATION NODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.
Notice that a AU4 not structured in ”AU4 Pass through” connection mode is never terminated by the
passed through node. In this case the passed through node DOES NOT have to be indicated as
DESTINATION NODE in ”HO Squelching Table”.
To fill the table of Figure 90. on page 146 for each High Priority AU4 in TX and in RX direction the user:
• can select the identifier of the source node
• can select the identifier of the destination node
• can specify if the HO container is VC12/3 accessed. (Not operative in this release).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 145 / 436
436
In the Figure 90. each AU4 (1st. column) is represented as a Transmission and Receiving stream:
• 2nd column – Source Node –the small circle and an associated string allows to define the
Node into which the relevant stream is Inserted. By clicking on the circle or on the string the

user can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.

• 3rd column – Destination Node – the small circle and an associated string allows to define
the Node form which the relevant stream is Dropped . By clicking on the circle or on the string
the user can select the Node number from the list displayed on the right side of the screen.
• 4th column – VC Access (not operative in this release ).
Figure 90. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – Squelching table for HO container
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 146 / 436
436
4.5.3.10 Squelching table for terminated LO container ( not operative in this release)
The Figure 91. allows the user to configure the Squelching table for 8 LO containers of the EAST and
WEST Aggregate . The table can be configured when the MS – SPRING is managed.
For each LO containers of the EAST Aggregate and for each LO containers of the WEST Aggregate the
user can select:
• the identifier of the primary source node
• the identifier of the secondary source node.
Figure 91. Connection Config. with Full Matrix – Squelching table for terminated LO container
(not operative in this release)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 147 / 436
436
4.5.3.11 AU–4’s Cross Connection for Aggregates
The data indicated in Figure 92. allows the user:

– among the AU–4’s of the Aggregate West

– among the AU–4’s of the Aggregate East
• to configure the type of cross–connection
Each Aggregate West AU–4 and each Aggregate East AU–4 (1st column) is represented by:
of the same side to which the AU–4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the
string the user can select from the destination Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the bottom
left of the screen.
cross–connection. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the list
displayed at the bottom–right of the screen
– None
– Unidirectional
– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload managed must have already been selected as NOT STRUCTURED.
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM16 Aggregate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 92. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AU4 Cross–connection for Aggregates
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 148 / 436
436
4.5.3.12 AU–4’s Cross Connection for Tributaries
The date indicated in Figure 93. allows the user :
•
to configure the Cross–Connection:

among the AU–4’s of the Tributary units
Each Tributary AU–4 (1st column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the destination
tributary AU4 to which the AU–4 port will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string
the user can select from the destination tributary AU–4’s list displayed at the bottom left of the
screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of cross–
Connection (list of the bottom right).
The user can select the same type of Cross–Connection as described for the aggregate AU–4.
Attention !
Figure 93. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix AU4 Cross–Connection for tributaries
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 149 / 436
436
4.5.3.13 AU–4’s Pass–Through Allocation
The data indicated in Figure 94. allows the user to configure the AU–4’s Pass–Through Connection
between the East Aggregate and West Aggregate. For each of the four AU–4 channels of the East

Aggregate the user can select the West side AU–4 channels to connect.

Each East side AU–4 is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifies the East side AU4 that is kept as reference for the AU–4
channel connection .
• 2nd column – the small circle on the left and an associated string that allow to define what West
side AU–4 transmits towards the aggregate East AU4 channel of the 1st column (W → E).
By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side AU–4 channels’
list displayed on the right of the screen.
• 3rd column – as above to define the West side AU–4 to which the aggregate East AU4 channel
of the 1st column will be sent (E → W).
Attention !
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for the STM–16 Aggregate.
Figure 94. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AU4 Pass–through

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 150 / 436
436
4.5.3.14 TU’s Drop/Insert Allocation for Tributary
The following description concerns Tributary (1 to 8) configuration.

• to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M or 3x34M or 3 x 45M or STM1 Tributary
1 and the Aggregates.
• to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
In order to configure the above connections, the application uses three different screens for each Tributary.
Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the tributary payload. Each TUG3
(1 up to 3) is correlated with the relevant physical 34Mbit/s reference port (1 up to 3). For the 21x2M
Tributaries only the first screen must be used.
By clicking on the NEXT and PREVIOUS keys allow the user to move within the three TUG3’s.
For the 34Mbit/s tributaries and TU3 of STM1 Tributaries, only the first line (TU3/34M/45M Port) is used.
Each TU is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port)
to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU to
which the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
can select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second list
on the right for the TU3.
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to configure the type of
at the bottom–right of the screen
– None
– Insert to West
– Insert to East
– Bridge
– Drop from East protected
– Drop from West protected
– Drop/Insert West protected
– Drop/Insert East protected
– Drop and Continue W/E Insert W/E
• 5th column – a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible mode
PPS (SNCP) with a fixed WTR (5 min.). If not selected (no cross inside the box) the PPS (SNCP)
is performed in not revertible mode.
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 151 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 95. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU drop/insert, tributary
152 / 436
4.5.3.15 TU’s Cross–Connection for Aggregate East/West
Cross–connection configurations for AU4 1 of the Aggregate WEST are specified herein. The cited
information permit to also configure the other AU4 of Aggregates WEST and EAST through the selection
of further 31 tables.
Tables referred to AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM–16 Aggregate.
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of the Aggregate West AU–4 #1 and the
TU’s of the Aggregate AU–4’s on the same side,
To configure the above cross–connections, the application uses three different screens.
Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the aggregate AU–4 #1 payload.
By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three TUG3’s.
Only the first line of the configuration (TU3) is used for the TU3.
Each TU of the Aggregate West AU–4 #1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU
of the same side to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the
user can select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected
AU–4 to which the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can
select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12, or the second list on
the right for the TU3.
connection. By clicking on the circle or on the user can select from the list displayed at the
bottom–right of the screen.
– None
– Unidirectional
– Bidirectional
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED.
The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 153 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 96. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU cross–connection. Aggregate
154 / 436
4.5.3.16 TU’s Cross–Connection for Tributary
Cross–connection configurations for Tributary 1 are specified herein. The cited information also permits
to configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables.
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of Tributary 1 and the TU’s of the
Tributaries
To configure the above cross–connections, the application uses three different screens.
Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the Tributary 1 payload.
By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screen.
Only the first screen must be used for the 21 x 2 M Tributaries.
Only the first line of the Configuration (TU3/34M/45M) must be used for the 3 x 34Mbit/s or 3x45Mbit/s units
or TU3 of STM1 Tributaries.
Each TU of Tributary 1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port (or 34/45 Mb/s port).
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to which
the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the
Tributaries list displayed at the top–right of the screen.
tributary to which the TU of tributary 1 channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or
on the string the user can select from the Tributary TU’s list displayed at the center–right of the
screen for TU12, the list at the top–right for the TU3/34 M or 45M port.
When the TU12/2 M Port refer to cross–connections with the 21x2M Tributaries, only the TU12’s
with Port 1 to Port 21 indication have to be selected.
displayed at the bottom–right of the screen The user can select the following types of
connections from the list:
– None
– Unidirectional
– Bidirectional
Attention !

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 155 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 97. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU cross–connection Tributary
156 / 436
4.5.3.17 2 M Tributary and 2 M tributary with Retiming Conditions
The table shown in Figure 98. allows to enable or disable each of the sixty–three 2 Mb tributary ports of
the three possible 2Mb Trib. units.
Figure 98. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 2 Mb/s tributary conditions
4.5.3.18 34M and 45M and DVB Tributary Conditions
The table shown in Figure 99. allows to enable or disable each of the three 34 Mbit/s or 45Mbit/s Tributary
ports of the eight possible 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s Trib. units.
The DVB enabling ports can be carried out in the same screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 99. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix. 34 Mb/s and 45 Mbit/s tributary conditions
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 157 / 436
436
4.5.3.19 2/34M Conditions of 34/2 and 5x2M Tributary.
The table shown in Figure 100. allows to enable or disable, for each of the three tributaries, the five 2 Mbit/s
port and the four groups of four 2 Mbit/s ports making up the 34 Mbit/s stream.

Figure 100. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix 34/2 and 5x2 Tran Mux Trib. conditions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 158 / 436
436
4.5.3.20 TU’s Pass–Through Allocation for Aggr. East AU–4
The data indicated in Figure 101. on page 159 allows the user to configure the TU’s Pass–Through
Connections between the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 and West Aggregate AU–4’s.
To configure the above pass–through connections, the application uses three different screens.
Each screen is dedicated to one of the three possible TUG3 inside the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 payload.
By clicking on keys NEXT or PREVIOUS the user can move within the three screens.
Only the first line of the Configuration (East TU3) must be used if TU3 are in the pass–through condition.
Each TU of the East Aggregate AU–4 #1 is represented by:
• 1st column – the number which identifies the East side (that is kept as reference for the
connection) TU channel
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU–4
transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W → E). By clicking on the circle
or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate Au–4’s list displayed at the top–right of
the screen.
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the what TU pertaining
to the AU previously defined, transmits towards the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column (W
→ E). By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TU’s list
on the right (third list for TU12, second list for TU3).
• 4th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define what West side AU–4
receives the Aggregate channel coming from East (E → W).
By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the Aggregate AU–4’s list
displayed at the top–right of the screen.
• 5th column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the TU of the selected
incoming AU4 West side that receives the Aggregate East TU of the 1st column. By clicking
on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side TU’s list.
Attention !

The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – TU pass–through Aggregate
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 159 / 436
436
4.5.3.21 Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW
The table shown in Figure 102. on page 162 allow the user to configure:

the Pass–through connections and the Termination of the data channels, V11 and G.703.

• the voice channel connections
The user can choose the following:
• for each Termination channel (V11 #1, V11 #2, V11 #3, G.703 #1, G.703 #2, G.703 #3) the
options are:
– none
Agg West/East Main / Active (available bytes: E1, E2, F1 and all free bytes of SOH.
Besides the F2 byte for the structured AU4)
Agg West/East AU4 # 1 – 16 (available bytes: F2, if the AU4 is structured)
STM1 Trib # 1–8 (available bytes: E1, E2, F1)
140M Trib #1–8 (available bytes: F2, F3)
– select the OverHead byte devoted to the channel

(Table: ”OH selection for Termination Channels”.)
It is also possible to select both the Aggregates Spare to convey to the terminations
the E1 and F1 bytes.
• for each of the possible Pass–through channels choose between:
– none
Agg West/East Main / Active
– select the OverHead byte assigned to the channel

(OH’s table for the ”Pass–Through Channels”.)
• Eow Extension Enabled.
In the following we describe how to use this function since the AUX/EOW Units
that can be used are:
AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2
AUX/EOW / 2 (for wide network)
1) Using the AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 unit.
– Select the ”Eow Extension Enabled” option.

– The User must HW preset the unit for the extension on the third voice channel (see the
Technical Handbook, HW Presetting section).
– Voice 3 channel must not SW set in this case because it is already used to realize the
extension. The Voice 3 channel can’t be used.
With this unit and under the previous conditions, the analogic bypass functionality, that
allows the party line connection between Voice 1,2 and the voice extension towards the
external by means the access panel of the equipment, will be activate.
The unit converts the speech signal passing through from East to West from digital to
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
analog and vice versa.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 160 / 436
436
2) Using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit.
– Do not select the ”EOW Extension Enabled” when using the AUX/EOW / 2 unit for WIDE
NETWORK otherwise the analogic bypass would permanently activated.
– Voice 3 channel must not SW set.

With this Unit , no digital to analog conversion is operated on the speech signal passing
through from East to West (digital bypass activated) and there is no limit on the number
of NE connected. When the AUX/EOW unit is for the WIDE NETWORK and Voice 3 is
configured and connected to a Tributary the analogic bypass is automatically activated.
3) With both unit.
– Voice 3 channel can SW set using Tributary unit.

– Do not select the ”EOW Extension Enabled”.
– The User must HW preset the unit to enable the Voice 3 channel on Tributary.
Having engaged the voice 3 channel, the digital bypass will be disabled and the EOW
passes through the double conversion
• select the MSOH Pass–through option (all the Multiplex Section OverHead bytes are
by–passed between the East–West Aggregates). Only RSOH bytes remain available for the
Pass through connection filling the ”Pass–Through Channels” selection of the Figure 102. on
page 162 .
• for the Voice channel
– Voice 1: select among:
AGG. West main; bytes E1, E2.

AGG. West AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.
STM–1 Tribs ; byte E1 or E2.
140 Mbit/s Trib.; byte F2.
AGG. East main; byte E1, E2

AGG. East AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.
AGG. West/East main; byte E1, E2.

AGG. West/East AU4 #1–16; bytes F2.
When in a ring connection, in one of the node only one Aggregate side must be used to avoid loop
of the speech.
Select the phone number ( 10 to 99 )
All the operative selections appear on the lists on the right.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 161 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 102. Connection Configuration with Full Matrix – AUX/EOW Connection
162 / 436
4.5.4 Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit)
The following is a list of the ”connection configuration VC4 Matrix” tables available (see Figure 103. ).
•
Signal label for Tributary cards

• AU–4’s Drop/Insert Allocation
• 140 Mbit/s Tributary Port Configuration
• AU–4’s Pass–through Allocation
• Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW
Each of the above tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
For some of the parameters indicated in the configuration table refer to the description given in the
introduction of para. ”Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application”.
Figure 103. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 163 / 436
436
4.5.4.1 Signal Label for tributary cards
The Table shown in Figure 104. indicates information on the signal label ”to be compared” (Rx side) and
”to be transmitted” (Tx side) of the 140 Mbit/s Tributary units.

For STM1 tributaries, the signal label must not be set because the signal label is not ”terminated”.
For each 140 Mb/s Tributary units the application allows to configure a couple of signal labels, and
displays:
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal Label ”to be compared
• a small circle and an associated string for the signal Label ”to be transmitted
By clicking on the circle or on the string, the user can select the proper signal label from the list on the right
of the screen:
• Unequipped
• Equipped not specified
• Asynchronous
For the 140 Mbit/s tributaries the value to set is: Asynchronous.
Figure 104. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix Signal label tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 164 / 436
436
4.5.4.2 AU–4’s Drop/insert Allocation
•
to configure the connections between the 140M/STM1 Tributary units and the Aggregate
AU–4’s.
Each Tributary (1st column) is represented by:
• 2nd column – the small cycle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate AU–4
to which the Tributary unit will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
at the bottom–right of the screen.
– None
– Insert to West
– Insert to East
– Drop from East protected (PPS/SNCP)
– Drop from West protected (PPS/SNCP)
– Drop/Insert West protected (PPS/SNCP)
– Drop/Insert East protected (PPS/SNCP)
• 4th column a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant AU a Revertible mode
is performed in not Revertible mode.
Attention !
AU4 5 to 16 can be used for the STM–16 Aggregates

When the matrix used is the VC4 Matrix Unit the PPS are not applicable with the ”LVC optical tributary”.
PPS works if the ”HVC optical 600 tributary” is used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 165 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 105. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – AU–4 drop/insert
166 / 436
4.5.4.3 140Mbit/s tributary port Configuration
The table shown in Figure 106. allows to enable or disable each of the eight possible 140Mbit/s port of
the relevant Tributary units.
Figure 106. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – 140 Mbit/s Tributary Port Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 167 / 436
436
4.5.4.4 AU–4’s Pass–Through Allocation
The data indicated in Figure 107. allows the user to configure the AU–4’s Pass–Through Connection
between the East Aggregate and West Aggregate.

For each of the four AU–4 channels of the East Aggregate the user can select the West side AU–4

channels to connect.
Each East side AU–4 is represented by:
• 1st column – The number which identifies the East side kept as reference for the connection
AU–4 channel.
• 2nd column – the small circle on the left and an associated string that allow to define what West
side AU–4 transmits towards the aggregate East AU4 channel of the 1st column (W → E).
By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the West side AU–4 channels’
list displayed on the right of the screen.
• 3rd column – as above to define the West side AU–4 to which the aggregate East AU4 channel
of the 1st column will be sent (E → W).
Attention !
As indicated on the screen the AU4 5 to 16 can be used only for STM–16 Aggregate.
Figure 107. Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix – AU–4 Pass–through
4.5.4.5 Connection Configuration by AUX/EOW

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The configuration for the auxiliary channels is as that specified in para. ”Connection Configuration by
AUX/EOW” on page 4.5.3.21 on page 160.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 168 / 436
436
4.5.5 DROP SHELF Connection Configuration
The following is a list of the connection configuration for the DROP SHELF extension with Full Matrix
Tables available ( see Figure 108. ).
• STM 1 E MODULES CONNECTION
• TU’s D / I ALLOCATION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9
• TU’s CROSS CONNECTION DS_ TRIB #1 TO # 9
• 2 M TRIBUTARIES CONDITION (referred to the 21x2 Mb Trib and 21x2 Mb Trib with Retiming)
Each of the above Tables will be detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
It must be noted that, starting from this Release:

The connections involving the Drop Shelf 2mBit/s streams and set using the Applications
cited above, are performed by the Line Shelf Full Matrix Unit.
The links between Drop Shelf STM–1 E Modules and the Line Shelf STM1 streams are
fixed. (STM–1 E Module #1,#2,#3 are connected respectively with the Switchable STM1
units #5, #6, #7).
The allocation of the Drop Shelf 2Mbit/s flows with the Drop Shelf STM–1 E Modules is
fixed. The Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #1, #2 and #3 flows , are collected by the STM–1
E Module #1 that grooms the Trib #1 flows into the TUG3 #1 of the proper STM1 #1......till
the last possible allocation that is relevant to the Drop Shelf 21x2 Mbit/s Units #7, #8 and
#9 flows that are collected by the STM–1 E Module #3 that grooms the Trib #9 flows into
the TUG3 #3 of the proper STM1 #3.
Fixed allocation means also that we are not obliged to equip the Line Shelf Switchable
Trib. starting from the 5th one. It is possible for example to equip only the LINE SHELF
TRIB. # 7 with its relevant DROP SHELF 21x2 Mb Units #7, #8 and #9.
Figure 108. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 169 / 436
436
4.5.5.1 STM–1E module connection
The table shown in Figure 109. allows to configure the connection between the DROP SHELF
STM – 1 E Module and the LINE SHELF STM 1 TRIBUTARIES #5 to #7. these connections are fixed.

By clicking on the small circle the user can choose the following options from the list:
• Not connected
• LINE SHELF – STM 1 Trib. # n
Figure 109. DROP SHELF Connection config. – STM–1E module connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 170 / 436
436
4.5.5.2 TU’s drop/insert allocation. DS Tributaries
•
to configure the TU connections between the 21x2M Tributary #1 to #9

• to configure the types of connection towards the Aggregates.
Each TU is represented by:
• 1st column – The number identifying the TU or the 2Mb/s port.
to which the Tributary TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
• 3rd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Aggregate TU to
which the Tributary channel will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user
can select from the third list displayed on the right of the screen for the TU12.
at the bottom–right of the screen
– None
– Insert to West
– Insert to East
– Bridge
– Drop from East protected
– Drop from West protected
– Drop/Insert West protected
– Drop/Insert East protected
• 5th column – a Cross inside the box allows to configure for the relevant TU a revertible mode
is performed in not revertible mode.
Attention !
The AU–4 payload must have already been selected as STRUCTURED. The AU4 5 to 16 (first list) can
be used only for STM–16 Aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 171 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 110. DROP SHELF Connection Config. – Drop/Insert allocation DS tributary
172 / 436
4.5.5.3 TU’s cross connection. DS Tributaries
Cross–connection configurations for a Tributary are specified herein. The cited information also permits
to configure the other Tributaries through a further selection of tables.
• to configure the cross–connections between the TU’s of Tributary #2 in the example and the
TU’s of all the DROP SHELF and LINE SHELF Tributaries.
Each TU of Tributary is represented by:
• 1st column – the number identifying the TU or the 2Mbit/s port.
• 2nd column – the small circle and an associated string that allow to define the Tributary to which
the TU will be connected. By clicking on the circle or on the string the user can select from the
Tributaries list displayed at the top–right of the screen (8 LINE SHELF Tribs and 9 DROP
SHELF Tribs).
tributary to which the TU of tributary #2 in the example will be connected. By clicking on the
circle or on the string the user can select from the Tributary TU’s list displayed at the center–right
of the screen for TU12.
displayed at the bottom–right of the screen The user can select the following types of
connections from the list:
– None
– Unidirectional
– Bidirectional
Attention !

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 173 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 111. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – TU’s cross connection. DS tributaries
174 / 436
4.5.5.4 2 Mbit/s Tributary (and 2 Mbit/s Tributary with Retiming) condition. DS Trib.
The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 112.
Figure 112. DROP SHELF Connection Config.– 2 Mbit/s trib. condition DS trib.(choice of element)
Figure 113. allows to enable or disable each of the twenty one 2 Mb tributary ports of the 2Mb Trib. units.
Figure 113. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – 2 Mbit/s tributary condition. DS trib.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 175 / 436
436
4.5.6 Local Configuration Application
This application is used to manage the local configuration data of the NE. Before starting any dialog the
cited data must be loaded onto the NE. Through this data the OS or the MNE ( Master NE that performs

the R–ECT functions) can locate the NE. The NE can configure the protocol stacks.

The following local configuration tables are available for the user ( see Figure 114. ):
• Local Configuration
• OS Configuration
• MS LAPD Configuration
• RS LAPD Configuration
• MF Configuration table
• ETHERNET Address Configuration
• R – ECT Configuration – Entry
The above are now defined as follows:
Figure 114. Local Configuration – Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 176 / 436
436
4.5.6.1 Local Configuration Table
This table, shown in Figure 115. allows the user to configure the LOCAL NE in order to be recognized
by the OS or by the Remote Craft Terminal
The LOCAL address consists of the following data fields:

– Area address
– System ID
– 7.1 address
– Intermediate system
Figure 115. Local Configuration
In details the Local Address is represented by :
The AREA ADDRESSES (up to 3) and system ID constitute the NSAP address (Network Service Access
Point) of the NE.
It is mandatory to set the first area address field. Area address 2 or 3 can be used as alias to obtain different
manual area addresses within one single TMN Routing subdomain.
The operators compiling it must be familiar with ISO – 10589 IS–IS Routing Recs.
Area address 2 or 3 can be changed by the operator without prompting equipment restart.
On the contrary, changes in mandatory Area Address, System ID and Intermediate System automatically
restart the equipment.
The NSAP address refers to level 3 (Network layer) of stack OSI and its structure complies with GOSIP
V2 or ISO_DCC format.
The AREA address is composed by the following fields:
• AFI : Authority and Format Identifier; (2 digit)
• IDI : Initial Domain Identifier (identifies the Nation); (4 digit)
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
VER : indicates the format of the following fields; (2 digit)
• AUTH : identifies the department; (6 digit)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 177 / 436
436
• RES : reserved field; (4 digit)
• DOMAIN & AREA : free fields for defining the network levels; (4 digit each one)

Another field, named SELECTOR (not presented to the operator) automatically inserts 2 digit.

For the GOSIP V2 format
– the AFI field is 47
– other fields : depend on network management structure
An example of GOSIP V2 format hypothetical address and system id is:
47 0005 80 010203 0000 0405 0607
AFI IDI VER AUTH RES * DOMAIN AREA
00206000001
* = value automatically inserted
SYSTEM ID
For the ISO_DCC format

other fields : depend on network management structure
For the LOCAL format

other fields : depend on network management structure
The value of the SYSTEM ID field (12–digit long) might be:
• the equipment MAC Ethernet address supplied by ALCATEL–TELECOM (level 2)
• selected by the operator
However it must be unique in the network.
The NSAP address (Area addresses and System ID) length can range from 16 v digit v 40.
N.B. When using a NSAP length < 40 digit the not used fields must be filled with star
characters : *
N.B. When using the LOCAL format, the equipment’s SW download from OS is supported only if the
OS is using the ISO DCC format (AFI 39) or the GOSIP V2 format (AFI 47)
The value of the 7.1 ADDRESS identifying the NE must be greater than 4 and must be different for each
NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 178 / 436
436
INTERMEDIATE SYSTEM: the operator can select whether the NE will work as an L1 or as an L2
Intermediate System by clicking on the L1 or L2 circle.
All the NEs belonging to an Area Address connected to other Area Address must be configured as
L2 Intermediate Systems (I.S.).The NEs connected together inside the same Area Address must be
configured as L1. For example, a NE Gateway connected to the OS and having different Area
Address must be configured as L2 I.S.
All the ADMs in the ring including the gateway NE should have the same ”mandatory area address”.
4.5.6.2 OS configuration
The screen of Figure 116. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address:
• The OS NSAP address is composed by:
– Area address
– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over
• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
It is suggested to insert a different Area Address for the OS if the GOSIP V2 format is used.
In case of LOCAL format the Area Address is the same.
The Gateway NEs should have a reachable Address Prefix definition in order to declare the OS from the
routing point of view (Routing tables).
WARNING
Be careful, in order to avoid loss of dialogue with the OS , the operator must insert correctly
the Area Address code of OS main.
If the OS can’t dialogue with the N.E because of the wrong address, the only way to restore the
connection is to connect physically the P.C to the N.E and fill again correctly the ”OS
configuration” table.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 179 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 116. Local Configuration – OS configuration
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
180 / 436
4.5.6.3 MS (RS) LAPD Configuration table
These tables permit to configure the LAPD use and ROLE for Aggregate and Tributary units in the DCCM
(MS) and DCCR (RS) channel connections. The table shown in Figure 117. is referred to the MS LAPD.
For each card the table defines the following:
• LAPD interface
– NO: card not concerned with DCC connections
– YES: card concerned with DCC connections
• LAPD role which is selected when the LAPD interface is used (YES).
– USER
– NETWORK
This selection is a must to establish connection between two NEs and one network role with one user role
interfaced.
Figure 117. Local Configuration – MS LAPD configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 181 / 436
436
4.5.6.4 Mediation Function Configuration table
This table (see Figure 118. ) allows the user to enable the Mediation Function, when interfacing non SDH
equipment with Q2 management.

The table permits to:
– insert the 7.1 address of the Q2 interface
– enable the Mediation Function
The application possible on the Mediation Function are presented at para 4.11 on page 319 .
The Network Configuration with Mediation Function is presented at para 4.12 on page 329 .
Figure 118. Mediation Function Configuration table

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 182 / 436
436
4.5.6.5 ETHERNET Address Configuration table
This table ( see Figure 119. ) allows the user to configure the following information associated to the
Ethernet address to be used when the NE is connected to the Ethernet interface:
• Ethernet interface, click YES if the Q3 interface is present.
• LOCAL Address; the MAC Ethernet Address must be inserted ( level 2 ).
The value can be copied by means of the RECEIVE function of the FILE option. Hence the value, if present,
is automatically received from the Futurebus Termination subunit of the Network Element. In this case,
even if the value is manually modified, it will not be operative.
The operator can also manually insert the MAC Ethernet Address value received from ALCATEL.
• L2 only parameter ( see Figure 120. on page 184 )
– False: if on the same interface, the L2 GNE also links NE pertaining to the same Area (e.g.
NE – B).
– True : if on the same interface, the L2 GNE links only GNE pertaining to the other Areas
(e.g. NE – A).
However the operator must refer to the ISO 10589 IS–IS Routing Recs.
Figure 119. Local Configuration – Ethernet address

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 183 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
NE
L2
957.120.732 A
B
NE
AREA 2
L2only=FALSE
OS
A
NE
AREA 1
Figure 120. Local Configuration – L2 only parameter
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
L2only=TRUE
AREA 3
184 / 436
4.5.6.6 R–ECT configuration
The Tributaries are selected through the table indicated in Figure 121.
Figure 121. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration (choice of element)
The table of Figure 122. allows the user to configure the remote NE that must be managed by a MNE
( Master Network Element ). The table contains 31 entries, each of them describing one remote NE. For
each entry the user can configure the following information:
– Enabling of the Entry when the NE must be controlled by the Master NE of the Network or not.
– NSAP address of the Remote NE:
• Area Address
• System identifier
– 7.1 address of Remote NE
In order to configure such information the application uses 31 different screens, one for each possible NE
of the network. The keys ” NEXT ” and ” PREVIOUS ” allow the user to move among the 31 screens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 122. Local Configuration – R–ECT configuration
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 185 / 436
436
4.5.7 Routing Table Configuration Application
Note that for this equipment release the IS–IS Routing function is automatically activated and the operator
must intervene only in the following conditions:

• Reachable Address Prefix Element when the NE interfaces other routing domains not
supporting the IS–IS function (e.g., OS with a different area address).
• Manual ES Adjacencies Element when the NE interfaces the same domain, with NEs not
acknowledging the IS–IS Routing (also for OS when it has the same Area Address).
The user can work on the following tables ( see Figure 123. ):
• Reachable Address Prefixes Element (RAP)
• Manual ES Adjacencies Element (MESA)
The above are defined in the description that follows.
Figure 123. Routing Table Configuration – Tables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 186 / 436
436
4.5.7.1 Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP) Element table
The Elements are selected through the table indicated in Figure 124.
A max. of 32 RAPs per NE can be configured.
The Reachable Address Prefixes Element table must be compiled only with those elements configured
as L2 Intermediate System in the LOCAL configuration.

These tables will be later used when the NEs are connected to other routing subdomains.
When selecting an element the operator will set the information given in Figure 125.
• Physical Interface to be selected from a list shown on the right of the screen (LAN or Aggregates
or Tribs).DCCR channels are used for the Aggregate unit, while DCCM channels are used for
both Aggregate and Tributary units.
• RAP: Area Address by inserting the value of the Area Address of the routing subdomain which
is connected through the previously indicated physical interface.
• MAC Address (level 2) of the connected element. It must de inserted only when the physical
interface operates as a LAN.
Figure 124. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of Element (RAP)
Figure 125. Routing Table Configuration – Reachable address prefixes element

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 187 / 436
436
4.5.7.2 Manual ES adjacencies (MESA) Element table
The table shown in Figure 126. is utilized to select the elements.

A max. of 32 MESAs per NE can be configured.

The MESA is used to define the ”reachability” of an ”adjacent NE” not supporting neither the IS–IS protocol
nor the ES–IS protocol.
The Operator will have to define the characteristics of this NE (MAC address and System ID) to enable
the IS–IS to acknowledge it.
The MESA must be inserted to define how to reach a NE not supporting the IS–IS protocol but belonging
to the same ”Routing domain” (and having the same ”Area Address”).
The MESA is supported by the LAN interface and can be applied to the L1 and L2 Intermediate Systems,
e.g., it can be applied to an OS if it belongs to the same subdomain (same Area Address).
As can be seen from Figure 127. the operator must insert the ”System ID” of the NE not supporting the
IS–IS protocol along with its ETHERNET MAC Address.
These values are usually different. If the ”System ID” is assigned with the ”default” value FFFF... then the
two values are identical (the MAC address is automatically copied in the ”System ID” field).
Figure 126. Routing Table Configuration – Choice of element (MESA)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 127. Routing Table Configuration – Manual ES adjacencies element
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 188 / 436
436
4.6 Alarm, status & control application
The A.S. & C. application:

• displays the failure condition and the status changes that have occurred on the NE,
• allows to move easily and quickly among the different screen levels
(option view – see Figure 140. on page 205 and Figure 141. on page 205)
• displays/prints the alarms and the statuses history,
• provides remote control access to force functionalities on the NE (see para 4.6.3 on page 249
for details ).
The data to display is arranged on different screen levels.
The alarm general information of the NE is displayed at the top of each AS & C screen.
Each synthesis is represented by a label which is green in normal condition.
If one of the alarms arises on the NE, the label changes colors.
The color of the alarm labels in alarm condition is indicated in Table 9. on page 190.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 189 / 436
436
Table 9. AS–C Colors of the Alarms Synthesis
AT Alarm receiving attention Magenta

UG Urgent Alarm Red
NG Not Urgent Alarm Yellow
IN Indicative Alarm Magenta
AC Abnormal Condition Magenta
Access enable for remote – control operation: Light blue

Local Craft Terminal access enabled by the management operative
system. (not enabled)
HI Environmental indication (Housekeeping alarm) NB1
UT Unavailable Time. 10 consecutive severely errored seconds. Magenta
LINE SHELF Battery : Fuse–broken alarm (Fuses housed in the Top

LF Rack Unit). OR alarm due to station power supply failure due to any Yellow
causes. The alarm criterion sent to the EC is :ORALIMI
LINE SHELF – Battery control Failure / Missing – (Service Batt.

LB missing/ AND OR failure or missing). The alarm criterion sent to the Yellow
EC is : PWANDOR
OS Isolation: link failed between Management Equipment Operation

OS Yellow
System and NE
ES Equipment Controller Unit fail Red
LINE SHELF
Converters Synthesis Yellow
Converters Fail
DROP SHELF
DF Yellow
Battery Fuse–broken alarm
DROP SHELF
DB Battery control Failure / Missing – (Service Batt. missing/ AND OR Yellow
failure or missing)
DROP SHELF
Converters Synthesis Yellow
Converters Fail
NB1 : The colour of the label depends on the severity of the Housekeeping Alarms received: red
for Urgent, yellow for Not urgent, magenta for Indicative. The colour associated to the most
severe alarm is present when more than one alarm is detected.
To reset the ”UT” labels, send the relevant AS & C Remote Control.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 190 / 436
436
The Figure 128. on page 192 and Figure 129. on page 192 represent the first screen level with or without
the Drop Shelf representation.
Figure 128. is present when ESCT Equipment Controller Unit is used.
Figure 129. is present when is used the SMEC2 Equipment Controller Unit that enables the DROP
SHELF extension management.

For both Line and Drop Shelf the first level screen shows two boxes representing the Logical view of
cards and a Physical structure with the indication of the numbered card slot.
In these boxes are shown the following synthesis of alarm:
– LOGIC VIEW
• Logical Alarm Synthesis
• Abnormal Condition
– PHYSICAL STRUCTURE
• Card Fail
• Internal Failure
– New Practice /Old Practice Management

• The Alarm,Status and Control – Main Screen shows if the equipment locally connected to the
CT is a New Practice or an Old Practice one. Also the OS is aware on this information via QB3*
interface.
On the first level screen are also shown labels indicating the following function:
– PPS:
• two small labels indicate the Forced Switch West or East of Path Protection Switching relevant
to Tributary TU protection and to the Aggregate AU set in Enhanced Connectivity and PPS
protected.
It is the ”OR” indication for all the tributaries PPS, forced in the ”Remote Control” option.
It can be: – green if there are not forced PPS
– magenta if there are forced PPS
– SW VERSION:
• shows the SW versions of all the Shelf Units
– OS :
• Active or Stand by (Line Shelf Only )
– MS SPRING:
• Node and Command Status (1661SM–C Line Shelf only )

To show the NODE behavior when the first fault occurs in the ring network MS SPRING
protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 191 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 128. Alarm,Status and Control – Main Screen,Line Shelf
Figure 129. Alarm,Status and Control – Main screen, Line and Drop Shelf
192 / 436
From the first level layout is obtained the second level layout that depicts the whole NE 1651 SM (see
Figure 130. for Line Shelf Logical view and Figure 131. for the relevant Line Shelf Physical Structure. The
analogous screens for the Drop Shelf are depicted in the Figure 132. on page 194 and in the
Figure 133. on page 194.
The equipment release is also indicated.

The slot No. indicated on the screen corresponds to the unit position inside the subrack, and is in
sequential order inside it from left to right and from top to bottom.
The Figures show the configuration of the cards contained in the equipment. The cards that are not
configured are not displayed.
Each card type can be inserted only in specific slots of the NE. Table 10. on page 195 and Table 11. on
page 196 list the slots contained in the Line and Drop Shelf and the associated card type.
Figure 130. Alarm Status and Control (AS & C) – Line Shelf, Logical View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 131. AS & C – Line Shelf, physical view
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 193 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 133. AS & C – Main screen, Drop Shelf, physical view
Figure 132. AS & C – Main screen – Drop Shelf , Logical View
194 / 436
Table 10. Card/slot relationship – LINE SHELF
Slot # Card
1 Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 – 45 or 140 Mb/s settings) – NB1
2 21x2 Mbit/s Trib., 140/STM1 Switch Trib., S –1.1 LVC Trib., L–1.1 LVC Trib.
3 or 3x34 Mbit/s Trib., L–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., S–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., 34/2–5x2M
4 Trib, 3 x 45M Trib.
Tributary Spare 1 – 140/STM1 Switch Trib, 21x2 Mb/s Trib, 3x34 Mb/s Trib.,
6
L–1.1/S–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib., 34/2–5x2M Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib.
7 Full Matrix or VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit)
8 VC4 Matrix or Spare Full Matrix
5
9 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary, S–1.1 LVC Trib. , L–1.1 LVC Trib. , 3x34 Mbit/s
10 Trib., L–1.1/S–1.1 HVC STM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib.
11
12
Tributary Spare 2 – 140/STM1 switch Trib or 3x34 Mb/s Trib., L–1.1/S–1.1 HVC
13
STM1 Trib. , 3 x 45M Trib.
14 Switch Unit /Alarm Interface Access Module (34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s) – NB1
15 Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module (34 – 45 or 140 Mb/s settings)– NB1
17 AUX / EOW
18 STM–4 Aggregate West 1 (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2)
STM–4 Aggregate East 2 spare (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2) or STM–16 Aggregate

19
East (S–16.1, L–16.1 or L–16.2) – NB2.
20 CRU Spare
21 CRU Main
22 STM–4 Aggregate East 1 (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2)
STM–4 Aggregate West 2 spare (L–4.1 or S–4.1 or L–4.2) or STM16 Aggregate

23
West (S–16.1, L–16.1 or L–16.2) NB1.
NB.1 : With Rel. 2.5.1 equipment physical structure (New Practice),the SWITCH UNITS
are not present.
The switching function is realized directly by means the interconnections within
the units by means the Access Modules.
This simulates a ” virtual switching unit”.
NB.2 : Two slots & (18+19 and 22+23) are assigned to each STM–16 Aggregate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 195 / 436
436
Table 11. Card/slot relationship – DROP SHELF
Slot # Card

1 not used slot
2 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.

3
4
5
6
7
8 ADM600 Interface Unit – Main and Spare

9
10 not used slot
11 21x2 Mbit/s Trib – Spare
12 21x2 Mbit/s Trib

13
14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 196 / 436
436
Clicking inside the logic box the LOGIC VIEW appears (see Figure 130. on page 193 or Figure 132. on
page 194). Each label depicted in it represents a card.
The blocks representing the alarm condition of the units, are present only if the unit has been configured
according to the configuration tables downloaded on the NE, anyway a label indicating the slot number
is always present.
Each label ( card ) is represented by:
• two rectangles
• two small labels (one for the AUX/EOW, three for the Switch Units – only for Old Practice
Equipment version instead of for the New Practice Equipment consider the NB.1 in
Table 10. on page 195).
• a label with the slot number
The first rectangle shows the card status. The card can assume the IN SERVICE or OUT–OF–SERVICE
status.
The second rectangle can show the ACTIVE or STAND–BY status.
If the card is out–of–service, then:
• the first rectangle is colored bright red showing a highlighted OUT string
• the second rectangle is colored bright red.
If the card is in service, then:
• the first rectangle is colored green showing a highlighted IN string .

• the second rectangle
– is colored green showing a highlighted ”IS–ACT”, if the card is in the ACTIVE state
– is colored bright red if the card is in the ”IS–STAND–BY” state.
The label on the right displays the ”OR” indication, it stands for abnormal conditions detected on the card,
and is not present for the AUX/EOW unit . The label is displayed even if the associated cards are not
configured. The label has a colored background.
1) it is colored green if there are no abnormal conditions
2) it is colored bright red if there is an abnormal condition. If a monochromatic display is used the
term colours black.
The label on the left displays the ”OR’ing of the logic alarms defined on the card.
The label background is colored:
3) green if there are no logic alarms
4) red if an URGENT alarm is active
5) yellow if a NOT URGENT alarm is active and there are no URGENT alarms present
6) bright red if an INDICATIVE alarm is active and there are no URGENT nor NOT URGENT
alarms present
When the alarm is present a letter ”A” appears.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
For the Switch Unit labels are present only in the ”Physical view”
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 197 / 436
436
Clicking inside the physical box the PHYSICAL VIEW appears (see Figure 131. on page 193 or
Figure 133. on page 194 ). Each card is represented by a numbered rectangle. The number inside it
identifies the slot into which the card is inserted.
The cards that are not configured are not displayed.

Each rectangle, associated to a logic structure, contains two small labels (three for the ”Switch Unit”).
The top label, INTERNAL FAILURE, represents the OR’ing of the following physical alarms:
• Card mismatch
• Software mismatch
• Card not responding
• Card missing
• other indications of the single card
The lower label represents the CARD FAIL and it is the OR’ing of the following physical alarms:
• Card Fail
• EEPROM fail
• Gate Array fail
• Card power fail
• other alarms of the single card
The indications described cannot be applied to the Connection Card Unit (indicated as VC4 Matrix) and
for the Switch Unit.
Two labels are provided for the VC4 Matrix unit as regards to ”logic” view and ”physical” representation:
• Card or software mismatch

• Card missing
For the ”Switch Unit” three labels are present indicating:
• Card fail
• Card missing
• Card mismatch
More detailed screens are not provided for these units.
In the STM–1 E Modules label that are represented in the upper part of the Drop Shelf physical structure
there is only one label indicating:
• Card Fail or Card Missing
More detailed subscreens can be accessed for each card and function both with regard to the physical
and logic view and for each function.
These subscreens detail the information displayed on the first and second screen.
To access these subscreens position the mouse on the card involved, and when the cursor is depicted
as a magnifying glass (see Figure 14. on page 65 ) click the left mouse–button.
The displayed information differs for each card/functions, and are presented in the next paragraphs.
For more details on the meaning of the unit’s alarms and the maintenance actions refer to ”Maintenance”
section .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 198 / 436
436
The same operation carried out on the HI label displays (second level) the housekeeping indications 1 to
8 received by the equipment on the relevant tagblock ( see Figure 134. on page 200) . Only the first three
Housekeeping indications are available for the user, the remaining five indications are dedicated
respectively to : SSU (Synchronous Supply Unit), OFA URG, NURG, ABN and the last for the Drop Shelf
AND BATT. Alarm.

For the Line Shelf / Drop Shelf Power Supplies are shown in Figure 135. on page 200 and in
Figure 136. on page 200 respectively, the labels indicating the Secondary Power Supply Fail.
The indication common to the detailed levels is green in normal condition, while those of the active
condition are listed in the following Table 12.
Table 12. Detailed levels common indications ( active )
IS – ACT PBA in–service and active ACTIVE, Magenta
IS – ACT PBA in–service and stand–by

STAND–BY, Magenta
(PBA=Printed Board Assembly=”unit”)
Commanded switch COMM SW, Magenta
Card Missing CRD MIS red
Card mismatch MSMTCH red
Software mismatch MSMTCH red
Card not responding Yellow
Card fail Red
LAPD fail Yellow
Switched Port S.PORT, Magenta
Protection Switch event SWITCH, Magenta

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 199 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 134. AS & C – Housekeeping
Figure 135. Line Shelf Power Supplies Label
Figure 136. Drop Shelf Power Supplies Labels
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
200 / 436
4.6.1 LINE SHELF AS&C description
4.6.1.1 AUX–EOW screen

Figure 137. shows the detailed screen of the AUX–EOW.

The AUX/EOW consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms:
• OH ACCESS (Overhead Access)
– Loss of Signal on G.703 Interface #1

• OH CONNECTIONS (Overhead Connections)
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and active

(PBA=Printed Board Assembly is synonymous with ”unit”)
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Software mismatch
– Card not responding
– Card fail
The change of colour, symbol or text in each label indicates the presence of a specific card alarm.
Figure 137. AS & C – AUX/EOW

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 201 / 436
436
4.6.1.2 21x2 Mbit/s tributary and 21x2 Mbit/s tributary with retiming Screen
Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.

The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 138. on page 204).

The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the
2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 139. on page 204)
The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen:
• 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels:
– the label at the bottom–right displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP)
– the label at the bottom–center displays the ”OR” of the abnormal conditions
– the label at the bottom–left displays the ”OR” of the alarms defined in the port
– the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
• CARD STATUS

– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by.
– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• Reference Clock:
– Loss of 2Mbit/s frame
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card 1
The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the top–left of the first screen.
From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen:
• by either selecting the option ”View” (see Figure 140. on page 205), or
• by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glass
glyph is displayed as a cursor.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 202 / 436
436
The selected screen (see Figure 139. on page 204) shows the following components with the relative
alarms:
LPT Lower order Path termination

• Mismatch of VC12 signal label
• VC12 Far End Receive Failure
• Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)
• 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm
• Day Threshold Cross Alarm
PI Physical Interface
• Loss of incoming Tributary signal
• Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Port selected for the reference clock

• Protection Switch Event (SNCP)
• Unequipped signal label (payload is empty)
• Internal Loopback
• Line loopback
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen.
To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected (see Figure 141. on page 205),
hence Previous Esc; if ”First” is selected, the Main Screen of Figure 128. on page 192 is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 203 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 139. AS & C – Port 1, Tributary
Figure 138. AS & C – 21 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
204 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 141. AS & C – View option 2
Figure 140. AS & C – View option 1
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
205 / 436
4.6.1.3 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary Screen
The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 142. on page 207 ) displays:

CARD STATUS

– IS–ACT PBA in service and active
– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by.
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary:
LPT (Lower order Path termination)
– Unavailable TU Path
– Mismatch of VC3 signal label
– VC3 FERF
– 15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm
– Day Threshold Cross Alarm
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
PI (Physical Interface)
– Loss of incoming Tributary signal

– Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Protection Switch event (SNCP)
• Line Loopback
• Unequipped signal label
The 3x34 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen.
Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card #1 to card #4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 206 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 142. AS & C – 3 x 34 Mbit/s Tributary
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
207 / 436
4.6.1.4 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary Screen
The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary screen (see Figure 143. on page 209 ) displays:

CARD STATUS

– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• The alarms of each of the 3 ports of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary.
The following are the functional blocks and associated alarms for each port of the 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary:
LPT (Lower order Path termination)

– Unavailable TU Path
– VC3 FERF
LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
– Loss of incoming Tributary signal
– Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided for each port on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Protection Switch event (SNCP)
• Line Loopback
The 3x45 Mbit/s Tributary name and numbers are displayed on the screen.
Additional labels are present only for the spare unit indicating the protected unit:
• Protected card # 1 to # 4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 208 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 143. AS & C – 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
209 / 436
4.6.1.5 34/2 – 5x2 Mbit/s Transmultiplexer Tributary screen
Two screens are utilized to display the Transmultiplexer’s Tributary unit.

The first screen (second level) is an overall view of the Tributary unit showing five 2 Mbit/s ports and the

34 Mbit/s port (see Figure 144. on page 212) and associated four 8 Mbit/s streams.
The second screen (third level) is a detailed view of the functions carried out together with the relevant
alarms occurring on each basic stream.
Refer to Figure 145. on page 213 (for the 2 Mbit/s stream), and to Figure 146. on page 213 (for the 34
Mbit/s stream).
The first screen showns the following functional blocks and relevant alarms:
• Five 2 Mbit/s ports each having four labels, i.e.:
– the label at the top–right indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source
– the label at the bottom–right shows the Protection Switch Event (SNCP)
– the label in the middle at the bottom shows the OR–ing of the ”Abnormal Conditions”
– the label at the bottom–left shows the OR–ing of the alarms defined in each port
• The 34 Mbit/s port with the four 8 Mbit/s streams each provided with three labels, i.e.:
– OR–ing of the alarms defined for each function

– Abnormal conditions
– Protection Switch Event
While for the whole unit it displays:
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
– Commanded switch
• CLOCK REFERENCE
– Loss of 2 Mbit/s frame
An additional label is provided for the 34 Mbit/s port indicating alarms:
– Loss of Tributary signal

– FERF: Far–end Receive Failure
– AIS received
– Line Loopback on 34M port
For the Spare Unit only there is a label indicating which Trib the Spare Unit is protecting.
The name of the 34/2–5x2M Transmux is indicated on the part at the top–left side of the first screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 210 / 436
436
Through the first screen the user can access a more detailed one:
• either by selecting the ”view” option (see Figure 141. on page 205 ),
•
or by clicking on one of the 2/8 Mbit/s Tributary port labels when the magnifying glass replaces
the cursor.
The selected screens display the following functional blocks and relevant alarms
(Second Screen – Third level):
• 2 Mbit/s ports (see Figure 145. on page 213):
LPC (Low order Path Connection)
LPT (Low order Path Termination)
– Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label

– FERF
– Unavailable TU Path. (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation)
– TU alarm indication signal
– Loss of incoming tributary signal
Additional labels are provided to indicate the following alarms:
– Port selected for the Reference Clock

– Internal loopback
– Protection Switch Event (SNCP)
– Unequipped signal label
The name of the Tributary port is shown at the top–left corner of the screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 211 / 436
436
• The 34 Mbit/s port can be further exploded into 8 and 2 Mbit/s (see Figure 146. on page 213);
moreover, two additional labels for each of the four 2 Mbit/s streams is shown from right to left
indicating:

– Internal loopback

– Protection Switch Event
– Unequipped signal label
For each 2 Mbit/s stream conveying into the 8 Mbit/s stream:
LPC (Low order Path Connection)
LPT (Low order Path Termination)
– Mismatch of VC12 Signal Label

– FERF
– Unavailable TU Path.
LPA (Low order Path Adaptation)
The following labels are provided for the 8 Mbit/s stream:

– Alarm Indication Signal received
– FERF
To access the higher level screens, select the VIEW option (see Figure 141. on page 205, then the
PREVIOUS ESC option.
By selecting option ”First”, the initial screen of Figure 130. on page 193 is accessed again.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 144. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Tributary
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 212 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 146. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 34 Mbit/s ports
Figure 145. AS & C – 34/2 and 5 x 2M Trans. Tributary – 5 x 2Mbit/s ports
213 / 436
4.6.1.6 140 Switchable Tributary Screen
The following presents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as 140 Mbit/s.
The screen is shown in Figure 147. on page 215. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture.

The 140 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarms and
statuses:
• PPI (Plesiochronous Physical Interface)
– Receive Loss of Signal

– Line Alarm Indication Signal
• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)
– Unavailable AU Path
– HO path FERF
• HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– Excessive BER B3 West

– Excessive BER B3 East
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following information:
• CARD STATUS

– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• Protection switch event (SNCP)
• Internal loopback
• Line loopback
For the spare unit only
– The low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection, not operative in this release)
– The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option ”140 M/EC STM–1 trib.” is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
composition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM–1.

The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 147. on page 215
Figure 148. on page 217.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 214 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 147. AS & C – 140 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
215 / 436
4.6.1.7 Electrical STM1 Switchable Tributary Screen
The following represents the 140/STM1 Switch Tributary unit configured as STM1 (electrical).

The screen is shown in Figure 148. on page 217. The Tributary name is displayed on the left of the picture.

(ELECTR HVC STM1)
The STM1 Switchable Tributary consists of the following functional blocks and of the associated alarms
and statuses:
• SPI (SDH Physical Interface)
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)
– Loss of Frame
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)
– Multiplexer Section AIS

– Excessive BER – B2
– Signal Degrade
– FERF: Far End Receive Failure
• SA (Section Adaptation)
– Loss of AU4 pointer
– Alarm Indication Signal Received
• HPC/PPS (Higher order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– B3 Excessive BER, West

– B3 Excessive BER, East
Detected in the signal received from Matrix. Used for PPS when Connection Card is
present.
• CARD STATUS

– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation).
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
– (MS–RS) LAPD fail (dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
management)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 216 / 436
436
• Protection switch event (SNCP)
• Line loopback
•
Internal loopback
For the spare unit only
– Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection not operative in this release)
– The protected card number (for N+1 protection)
Option ”140 M/EC STM–1 trib.” is used to Subrack Configure the Spare unit protecting a mixed
composition of trib. 140 M and Elect HVCSTM–1.
The option corresponds to a screen summarizing the information contained in Figure 147. on page 215
Figure 148.
Figure 148. AS & C – STM1 Electrical Switchable Tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 217 / 436
436
4.6.1.8 Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary Screen
Figure 149. on page 219 shows the detailed screen of the STM–1 tributary Optical unit (Long or short
haul).

The name of the unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen (OPTICAL LVC STM1)
Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms:
– Laser Fail
– Laser Degraded
– Bad Media Depending Mismatch
– Loss of Frame alignment
– Multiplexer section AIS

– Excessive BER (high BER–B2)
– Signal Degrade (low BER–B2)
– Far End Receive Failure
– Loss of AU pointer
– RX AU path AIS
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS–active protection for fault conditions)

– Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts after
ALS)
– NO ALS (ALS not implemented. Set in Equipment Configuration)
• CARD STATUS

– IS–ACT PBA in service and stand–by
– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation)
Not operative for this unit in this release.
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Management)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 218 / 436
436
• Protection Switch Event
• Line loopback
•
Internal loopback
• Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release.
– 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 149. AS & C – Optical LVC STM1 Tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 219 / 436
436
4.6.1.9 Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary Screen (Opt. 600 Trib.)
Figure 149. on page 219 shows the detailed screen of the STM–1 tributary Optical unit (Long or short
haul).

The name of the unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen (OPTICAL HVC STM1)
Moreover the screen shows all the components with the relevant alarms:
– Laser Fail
– Laser Degraded

– Excessive BER (high BER–B2)
– Signal Degrade (low BER–B2)
– Far End Receive Failure
– Loss of AU pointer
– RX AU path AIS
• HPC/PPS (High order Path Connection and Path Protection Switching)
– Excessive BER (high BER–B3), EAST and WEST. Detected in the signal received from
Matrix and used for PPS when Connection Card is present.
Additional labels are provides on the screen to indicate the following information:
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS–active protection for fault conditions)
– Forced laser on (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Forced laser off (set in Equipment Configuration)
– Laser abnormal condition (present with FORCED ON/OFF and restore attempts after
ALS)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 220 / 436
436
• CARD STATUS

– Commanded switch (activated in the remote control operation)

Not operative for this unit in this release.

– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
Management)
• Protection Switch Event
• Line loopback
• Low priority traffic (for 1:1 protection). Not operative in this release.
– 1:1 protections are not operative in this release.
Figure 150. AS & C – Optical HVC STM1 Tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 221 / 436
436
4.6.1.10 Full Matrix screen
The Full Matrix screen ( see Figure 151. on page 224 ) consists of the following functional blocks and
associated alarms and statuses:

• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)
This functional block contains the following synthesis label:
– Loss of Multiframe alarm;

The screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm (see Figure 152. on page 224).
– FERF alarm.
the synthesis of the 40 instances of the FERF alarm (third level screen).
– Unavailable AU4 path.

This screen displays 16 alarm instances. It is operative only for 1661SM–C and for AU4
in enhanced connectivity.
– Signal Label Mismatch alarm.

the synthesis of the 40 instances of Signal Label Mismatch alarm (third level screen).
– Path Trace Mismatch alarm (Not operative in this release).
– Excessive BER – B3 alarm.

This screen displays the 40 instances of the alarm.
To display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on one of this label.
The screen displays the 40 instances of the relevant alarm (see for example Figure 152. on
page 224, referred to the ” Loss of Multiframe ” alarm).
• HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)
This functional block contains the following synthesis label:
– The synthesis of the ” Loss of TU pointer ” :

to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.
The new screen (see Figure 153. on page 225) displays 40 labels, each of these
represents the synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”Loss of TU12 Pointer” or the synthesis
of the 3 istances of the ”Loss of TU3 Pointer” (the 11 of each TUG3).
To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels (see
Figure 154. on page 225 )
– The synthesis of the ” TU AIS ” :

to display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.
The new screen displays 40 labels, each of these represents the synthesis of the 63
instances of the ”TU12 path AIS” or the synthesis of the 3 istances of the ”TU3 path AIS”
(the 11 of each TUG3).
To display the 63 instances screen the user clicks on one of the cited labels.
– The synthesis of the ” Unavailable TU Path ”of the eight Tributaries:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
To display the more detailed level the user clicks on this label. It will appear a screen that
shows the eight tributary labels, each containing a small box that allows to reach another
level screen.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 222 / 436
436
Each screens displays:
• The synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”unavailable TU Path alarms ” if the TUG 3
consists of TU12 channels.
• If the TUG3 consists of TUG3 channel the screen shows a synthesis of the 3
instances of the ”unavailable TU Path alarms” (the 11 of each TUG3)
• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)
This functional block contains the synthesis label of the TU Protection Switching Event
To display the more detailed level screen the user clicks on this label.
This screen contains 8 labels, referred to the signal of the 8 tributaries (see Figure 155. on page
226).
Each label represents:
– the synthesis of the 63 instances of the ”TU12 Protection Switching Event” if the TUG3’s
consist of TU12 channels
– the synthesis of the 3 istances of the ”TU3 Protection Switch Event” if the TUG3’s consist
of TU3 channel (the 11 of each TUG3)
To display these detailed level screens the user clicks on the cited label (see Figure 156. on page 226)
• CARD STATUS

– Commanded switch (activated in the Remote Control operation)
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• One functional block ( UNEQ SL ) that represents the synthesis of the 40 instances of the
Unequipped Signal Label (byte C2) indication. To display the third level screen the user clicks
on the cited label. The screen displays the 40 indications instances (see Figure 157. on page
226)
• A functional block ( AU4 PSE ) represents the Synthesis of the 16 AU4 Protection switch event
relevant to the AU4 in Enhanced connectivity and PPS protected.
• The Low Priority Traffic information is for the spare unit only (1:1 protection, not operative in this
release)
The screen also indicates the assignment of the Matrix blocks to the units:
• E1 to E16 for the East Aggregate

• W1 to W16 for the West Aggregate
• T1 to T8 for the TRIBUTARIES
WARNING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
When STM–4 Aggregate is used, only E1 to E4 and W1 to W4 BLOCKS ARE USED.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 223 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 151. AS & C – Full Matrix
Figure 152. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOM of HPT
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
224 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 153. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOP of HPA
Figure 154. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
225 / 436
Figure 155. AS & C – Full Matrix, PSE of LPC
Figure 156. AS & C – Full Matrix, PSE of LPC, Trib 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 157. AS & C – Full Matrix, Unequipped Signal Label – C2
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 226 / 436
436
4.6.1.11 STM–4 Aggregate Screen
Figure 158. on page 228 shows the detailed screen of the STM–4 Aggregate East and West.
The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen.
Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses:
– Laser fail
– High Laser Temperature
– Laser degrade
– Loss of Frame

– Signal Degrade – B2
– Loss of AU pointer (1–4)

– Rx AU path AIS (1–4)
• HPC (Higher order Path Connection)
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS – active protection for fault condition)

– Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration)
– Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration)
– Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after
ALS).
• CARD STATUS

– Commanded switch (activated in Remote Control operation)
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
– (MS–RS) LAPD fail – dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
management
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 227 / 436
436
• Line loopback

The ”Low Priority Traffic” information is useful only for the spare unit

(1:1 protection, not operative in this release).
Figure 158. AS & C – STM4 Aggregate

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 228 / 436
436
4.6.1.12 STM–16 Aggregate Screen
Figure 159. on page 231 shows the detailed screen of the STM–16 Aggregate East and West.
The name of the card involved is shown on the left of the screen.
Moreover the screen consists of the following functional blocks and associated alarms and statuses:
– Laser fail
– High Laser Temperature
– Laser degrade
– Loss of Frame
– K1 – K2 Error
– Signal Degrade – B2
– Loss of AU pointer (1–16)

– Rx AU path AIS (1–16)
• HPC (Higher order Path Connection)
– Au4 Protection Switch Event, as a synthesis of 16 AU4 PSE reachable by clicking inside
the label (see Figure 160. on page 231). They are used only for MS SPRING – DC / IC
protection where the AU4 are supplied from TRIB and in case of protection they are
supplied by the Line. When this happens the relevant colour label changes from Green to
Magenta.
• LASER STATUS
– Laser Shutdown (ALS – active protection for fault condition)

– Forced laser ON (set in equipment configuration)
– Forced laser OFF (set in equipment configuration)
– Laser abnormal condition (present with ON and OFF FORCED and restore attempts after
ALS).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 229 / 436
436
• SWITCH STATUS
The switching status condition relevant to MS SPRING protection :

– Bridge E/W

Bridge. It is only active during the temporary phase of the carrying out of the protection
Protocol. It will light off in steady state.
Bridge and Switch , active during the switch between the High Priority AU4 and Low
Priority AU4 on the Node involved in the Protection, that means the Node adjacent to the
Line failure.
• CARD STATUS

– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
– (MS–RS) LAPD fail – dialog interrupted with Equipment Controller referred to DCC
management
• Line loopback
• Pass Through Fail.

It is active when the external coaxial connections on the AGG STM16 UNIT are not done or
when the TX to RX ( and vice versa) connections are not correctly executed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 230 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 159. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 160. AS & C – STM16 Aggregate, AU4 PSE of HPC
231 / 436
4.6.1.13 CRU Screen
The CRU card is shown on two detail screens:

the first screen shows the CRU card in detail (see Figure 161. on page 235)

• the second screen shows each of the 6 External/Internal references of the detailed CRU
(see Figure 162. on page 235 as External references example).
The screen shown in Figure 161. on page 235 displays the CRU A and CRU B cards.
The CRU name is displayed on the left of the screen. The CRU consists of the following functional blocks
and associated alarms and statuses:
• SELECT B (INTERNAL REFERENCE).To select the internal T0 reference.
– Contains six blocks each representing the 6 Internal References.

The 6 Internal References are selected by the operator in the Equipment Configuration
Application, following a priority list, to synchronize the equipment (T0).
– Each block contains the following boxes and labels:
D INT #n (where n=1..6) – the top label indicates the reference number.
D CRU REFERENCE – (top right box) highlights when the timing reference is assigned.
D CRU ALARMS – (left box) is the OR–ing of the LOS and DRIFT alarm detected on
the corresponding timing reference.
D SSM VALUE – (middle box) highlights when the SSM value differs from G.811.
The SSM values are reported on the second screen.
D CRU COMMAND – (right box) highlights when the timing reference is in lockout,
or force/manual selection (through the Remote Control of the AS&C Application).
D LOCKED MODE – the label at the bottom highlights when the timing reference is
locked. (This reference is used to synchronize the equipment – T0).
– OSCILLATOR
It indicates the operative mode which differs from Locked, when no valid Internal
Reference clock is available .
D Holdover (oscillator locked to the last valid stored reference clock).
D Free–running (free oscillator)
• SELECT A (EXTERNAL REFERENCE). To select the external T4 reference.
– It contains six blocks each representing six External References.

The six External References are selected by the operator in the Equipment Configuration
application, following a Priority List, to supply a clock towards the external equipment (T4).
Each box is as that of the INTERNAL REFERENCE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 232 / 436
436
– SQUELCH
The box highlights when the outgoing External/Internal Reference is inhibited.
SQUELCH on EXT (T1 → T4)

D
It is used to either enable/disable the transmission of the selected T1 clock towards the
T4 external clock.
D SQUELCH T0 → T4
Might not be used. If used, it enables/disabled the transmission of the selected T0
clock towards the T4 external clock.
The activation of the squelch is based on the ”Synchronism Quality Thresholds”

determined by the operator during Equipment Configuration.
– SELECT C
D T0/T4
D T1/T4
To select on T4 (clock supplied to the EXTERNAL source) the following must be present:
D the operative EXTERNAL CLOCK (T1) from the six available ones, or
D the clock that is operative on T0 (the same clock supplied internally to the equipment).
Selection is made by the operator in the Equipment Configuration application.
• CARD STATUS
– PBA in–service and active

– PBA in–service and Stand–by
– Forced CRU (the user has selected the forced EPS command)
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
The second screen is available for each of the internal and external references to obtain the detailed
information from the screen of Figure 162. on page 235.
• SYNCH SOURCE (one label is active when a reference is assigned) from:
– 2 MHz A
– 2 MHz B
– Aggregate STM 4 W1
– Aggregate STM 4 W2 / STM 16 W
– Aggregate STM 4 E 1
– Aggregate STM 4 E 2 / STM 16 E
– Tributary 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 233 / 436
436
• ALARMS
– LOS
– DRIFT

• SSM Value (When a reference is assigned ) : quality information received in S1 of STM1)
– G.811
– G.812T
– G.812L
– G.81S
– Q Unknown
– Don’t use
– Unattended (SSMB received with a code not corresponding to those listed in the Rec.)
• EXTERNAL COMMANDS (forced by the operator to Remote Control of AS & C Application)
– Lockout (Inhibits switching)

– Force (switches reference clock )
– Manual (switches only if permitted by the alarm condition of the reference)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 234 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 161. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 162. AS & C – Clock Reference Unit (Synch. Reference)
235 / 436
4.6.1.14 PPS Forced Switch
Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function.

The second level screen ( see Figure 163. ) shows the Forced PPS (W/E) of each units, Tributaries and

Aggregates, decided with ”Remote Control” commands. The label PPS AGG is dedicated to the forced
switches of AU4 in Enhanced Connectivity.
The third level screen (see Figure 164. on page 237. ) indicates the forced PPS (W/E) for the TUG3 and
VC4 of the selected unit. The label VC4 puts in evidence the forced switch about Tribs carrying bulk VCs
The fourth level screen (see Figure 165. on page 237 ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU.
After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label color becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarm is
lighted up.
Figure 163. AS & C – PPS, units

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 236 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 165. AS & C – PPS, ports/TU
Figure 164. AS & C – PPS, TUG3 and VC4
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
237 / 436
4.6.1.15 Software Version Screen
The second level screen ( see Figure 166. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible to
check the actual SOFTWARE VERSION.

The third level screen ( see Figure 167. ) shows the software version for the selected unit .
Absent units have all ”0” indication.
Figure 166. AS & C – Software version, units

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 167. AS & C – Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 238 / 436
436
4.6.1.16 MS SPRING status
The second level screen (see Figure 168. ) shows the present NE as a Node involved in the MS SPRING
protection function.
Attributes are shown with reference to the protection foreseen among the NEs of the Network.
The indications given about Node Status are:
• Pass–Through – The protection is activated in the Network but the node is not directly involved
because it is not adjacent to the failed span. Low priority AU4s are put in Pass–Through.
The K1, K2 bytes are also put in Pass–Through to allow the dialogue between the two Nodes
that are adjacent to the failed span.
• Switching – The protection is activated and the Node is directly involved in it.
The Node have to bridge in TX side all the Main and Spare AU4 and switch them in the RX side.
• Idle – when there is no need to activate the protection.
The protection algorithm foreseen the possibility to force the protection by means the CT with commands,
with different priority levels, sent using the Remote Control function of the AS&C application and gives
a relevant reporting in the Command Status Label.
The indications given about the Command Status are:
• Manual command: it activates the protection.

• Force Command : it activates the protection and it has greater priority than the MANUAL
command when this latter has been activated by other sources.
• Lockout Command : it removes the protection whichever was the cause that has activated it,
alarm or external command.
N.B. When the MS SPRING algorithm is ENABLED and ACTIVE in a ring NO SNCP can be
configured because this would remove of MS SPRING protection.
N.B. When the SNCP is configured, NO MS SPRING can be activated, because this would cause
the removal of SNCP protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 168. AS & C – MS SPRING status
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 239 / 436
436
4.6.1.17 Operating System screen
The second level screen of Figure 169. shows the status for the two Operating Systems (if any), indicating
whether is the ”OS Main” or the ”OS Spare” that is managing the NE .

Figure 169. AS & C – OS status

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 240 / 436
436
4.6.2 DROP SHELF AS&C description
In the Drop Shelf main screen (see Figure 132. on page 194 ) the card and function logic representation
pertaining to the Drop Shelf are presented.
The shown unit are the ADM 600 I/F, the 21X2Mbit/s (this latter is the same unit used in the Line Shelf)
and the STM–1 E BISEPA Module.
The functions represented are related to the PPS management and the SW version label that have the
same meaning as in the Line Shelf.
On the right side of the figure each card is represented by a numbered rectangle corresponding to the slot
into which the unit and modules are inserted.
The alarm representation in each label follows the same criterion seen in the Line Shelf Main screen in
para 4.6 on page 189.
4.6.2.1 ADM 600 Interface screen, Drop Shelf
The Figure 170. on page 242 shows the detailed screen of the ADM 600 I/F Unit.
The name of the Unit involved is shown at the top–left of the screen ( ADM 600 A or B ).
The screen shows all the logical components with the relevant alarms:
– Transmitter fail
– Receive Loss Signal
– Multiplexer section AIS ( MS AIS )
– Alarm indication Signal Received ( AU4 Path AIS )
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination )
– Loss of multiframe
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 241 / 436
436
• CARD STATUS

– IS–ACT PBA in service and standby

– Commanded Switch
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
In both main and spare Unit is put in evidence which is the ” STM – 1 E Module ” that is selected to supply
the Clock Reference .
Figure 170. AS & C – ADM 600 Interface, Drop Shelf

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 242 / 436
436
4.6.2.2 STM – 1 E Module
The STM – 1 E Module # 1 to # 3 are represented in the Drop Shelf AS&C Main screen in Figure 132. on
page 194 by the relevant three labels, each of them carrying the following alarm:
Card Fail or Card Missing
4.6.2.3 21 x 2Mbit/s trib. screen, Drop Shelf
Two screens are utilized for the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
The first screen (second level) shows a detailed view of the Tributary card (see Figure 171. on page 245).
The second screen shows a detailed view (Third Level Layout) of each of the 21 ports making up the
2Mbit/s Tributary card (see Figure 172. on page 245 )
The following functional blocks and relevant alarms are displayed on the first screen:
• 21 Tributary Ports each provided with four labels:
– the label at the bottom–right displays the Protection Switch event (SNCP)
– the label at the bottom–center displays the ”OR” of the abnormal conditions
– the label at the bottom–left displays the ”OR” of the alarms defined in the port
– the label at the top indicates if the port has been selected as a clock source.
• CARD STATUS
– IS–ACT PBA in–service and stand–by.
– Card missing
– Card mismatch
– Card fail
• Reference Clock:
– Loss of 2Mbit/s frame

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 243 / 436
436
Additional labels are present only on the 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. unit used as spare indicating the protected unit:

Protected card 2

The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary name and number are displayed at the top–left of the first screen.
From the first detailed screen the user can access a further detailed screen:
• by either selecting the option ”View” or
• by clicking on one of the labels representing the tributary port when a small magnifying glass
glyph is displayed as a cursor.
The selected screen (see Figure 172. on page245 ) shows the following components with the relative
alarms:
LPT Lower order Path termination
Mismatch of VC12 signal label
VC12 Far End Receive Failure
Unavailable TU Path (TU AIS in receive side, the 2Mbit/s path is not closed)
15 Minute Threshold Cross Alarm
Day Threshold Cross Alarm
PI Physical Interface
Loss of incoming Tributary signal
Line AIS (AIS received)
Additional labels are provided on the screen to indicate the following alarms:
• Protection Switch Event (SNCP)
• Port selected for the reference clock
• Line loopback
The name of the tributary port is displayed on the left side of the second screen.
To access the higher level screen, the VIEW option must be selected, hence Previous Esc; if ”First” is
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
selected, the Main Screen is displayed.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 244 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 171. AS & C – 21x2M trib, Drop Shelf
Figure 172. AS & C – 21x2M port, Drop Shelf
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
245 / 436
4.6.2.4 DROP SHELF PPS Forced Switch
Beside the first level screen indications, other three screens are used for this function.

The second level screen (see Figure 173. ) shows the Forced PPS (W/E) of each units, decided with

”Remote Control” commands.
The third level screen (see Figure 174. on page 247 ) indicates the forced PPS (W/E) for the TUG3 of the
selected unit.
The fourth level screen (see Figure 175. on page 247 ) indicates the forced PPS for ports or TU.
After a forced PPS switch the relevant green label colour becomes bright red and the Abnormal alarm
is lighted up.
Figure 173. AS&C – PPS, units, Drop Shelf

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 246 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 175. AS&C – PPS, ports, Drop Shelf
Figure 174. AS&C – PPS, TUG3, Drop Shelf
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
247 / 436
4.6.2.5 DROP SHELF Software version screen
The second level screen ( see Figure 176. ) shows all the unit of the equipment in which is possible check
the actual SOFTWARE VERSION.

The third level screen ( see Figure 177. ) shows, for the selected unit, the software version.
Absent unit have all ”0” indication.
Figure 176. Drop Shelf – Units Software version

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 177. Drop Shelf – Software version, detail.(Data are an example)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 248 / 436
436
4.6.3 Options of the AS&C application
In the Alarm Status & Controls window the following options are present: VIEW; HISTORY; REMOTE
CONTROL
A small triangle is present on the same line where the cited options can be selected.
General information on the application is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
VIEW: this option (see Figure 178. ) permits to move among the different screen levels.
This option permits to select the subscreen of a particular card.
This option permits to select the Physical or Logical rapresentation or one of the
functions. From the Physical or the Logical rapresentation it permits to select the
subscreen of a particular card.
When the option is selected in a lower level screen, the screen of higher level,
or that of first level, can be accessed again.
Each selection is made by clicking left mouse–button once on the desired option.
Figure 178. AS & C – View option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 249 / 436
436
HISTORY: the ”History” option permits to display or print information from a file
(see Figure 179. ).
This file will always contain the last 3000 alarms/events occurred on the NE.

The operator will select the data to display or print through the options of
Figure 180. on page 251 :
Display Time permits to select a particular set of alarms/events referred

to one of the present units or a particular equipment
function.
If select ALL, all the alarm/events are selected.
Mnemonic permits to select a specific alarm/event of the previously

selected TITLE.
Classification permits to select the alarms/events compliant with the

classification decided .
Data Filter if enabled (X) permits to decide a Begin / End Date and
Time of the previously selected alarm / event.
After having selected the desired option, a video window of 10 rows appears con-
taining the last 10 alarms/events (corresponding to the selection characteristics
introduced), see Figure 181. on page 251. This window can be scrolled to display
all the selection characteristic alarms. If the printing option has been selected, all
the messages relative to the introduced characteristics are directly sent to the
printer.
During the display phase, the alarm window can be moved to more functional
sections of the video (usually at the bottom of the video).
The information of each alarm/status row is:

• Event date
• Event hour
• Name of the alarmed entity
• Alarm acronym
• Alarm classification
• Alarm start/clearing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 179. AS & C – History
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 250 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 180. AS & C – History choice
Figure 181. AS & C – History display
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
251 / 436
REMOTE CONTROLS
This option allows the user to transmit the required remote control.

When this option is selected, the user can choose (see Figure 182. on page 254):

• whether to list all the remote controls, or
• whether to list the remote controls of the displayed unit
Note that the remote controls: Force – Enable Line or Internal Loopback – Lockout spare
The Remote controls list is accessed and the user can choose and execute the command. For example,
the selections required to transmit the ”Restart Equipment” remote control are shown in Figure 183. on
page 254.
Figure 184. on page 255 appears requesting confirmation.
When the remote control reaches the NE, the operator receives an acknowledging message (see
Figure 185. on page 255).
N.B. Before changing the Main side of a protected connection we must CLEAR the FORCE SWITCH
eventually activated, otherwise the CT report will remain as FORCED SWITCH even if that is
no more true.
The following are the lists of the remote controls enabled on each card:
• Equipment Controller
– Restart Equipment (general equipment reset)
– Alarm receiving attention (AC indication ON, stores the URG–NURG alarm,
now free or other alarm indications)
– Reset UAT alarms (Unavailable Time, Performance Monitoring indication in
AS&C and Maintenance Memory)
– PPS
– Force West / East or Clear Tributary Path Protection Switching on single VCs
– MS SPRING
– Force / Clear / Lockout / Manual West or East 2F MS SPRING.
• STM4 and STM16 Aggregate units
– Clear switch command

– Commanded switch (only simplified APS)
forcing into service the Spare with respect to the Main Aggregate
– Enable/Disable Internal (only for STM4 Aggregate Unit)/Line loopback
• CRU units
– Commanded switch; forcing into service. Main to Spare

– Force INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch Main to Spare)
– Lockout INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Disable switch possibility)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Manual INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6 (Switch commanded only if possible)

– Clear INT/EXT Synch. #1 to #6
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 252 / 436
436
• 21X2 Mb/s tributaries
– Clear switch Command

– Commanded switch, forcing service the spare with respect to the selected trib.
(1,2 or 3).
– 2M trib. spare switch towards the other trib is not operative.

– Enable/Disable Internal/Line Loopback
• Full Matrix unit

– Commanded switch, forcing into service. Main to Spare
• STM1 tributaries

– Commanded switch STM1 – Forcing into service the spare with the selected
IN–SERVICE unit.
– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
• 140 Mb/s and Electrical STM1 Tributaries

– Commanded switch – Forcing into service the spare with respect to the selected
”IN–SERVICE” unit.
– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback
• 3X34 Mb/s tributaries
– Clear command
– Commanded switch – Forcing into service the spare with respect to the selected
”IN–SERVICE” unit.
– Enable/Disable Internal/Line loopback #1 to #3
• 34/2 Tran Mux
– Clear command
– Commanded switch
– Enable/Disable Line loopback
– Force active/Clear Force
• 5X2M Tributary
– Enable/Disable Internal loop

– Enable/Disable line loop
• 34/2 – 2MBit/s Tran Mux

– Enable/Disable Internal loop 2M #1 to # 4
• 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributaries
– Clear command
– Command switch – Forcing into service the spare with respect to the selected
”IN SERVICE” Unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Enable/Disable Internal / Line loopback # 1 to # 3
N.B. When forcing internal / line loopback the signal is also transmitted in the normal direction.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 253 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 182. AS & C – Remote Control
Figure 183. AS & C – Remote Control Selection
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
254 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 185. AS & C – Remote Control results
Figure 184. AS & C – Remote Control, Confirmation
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
255 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
256 / 436
4.7 Maintenance Memory Application
4.7.1 Description
The Maintenance Memory function allows to access information on the occurrence or clearing of EVENTS
on the NE.
The events that have occurred are stored in the Maintenance Memory by the NE.
The maintenance memory is structured into blocks. Each block is associated to an entity defined inside
the NE, and each entity is associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block.
The entity can be grouped in the Group entity. The following Group Entity and associated entity are
defined in the NE.
Specifically:
• Line External alarms 1 and 2 log
The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing of
the external alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf.
The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Line equipment:
1=slots 2 to 13; 2=slots 17 to 23.
• Drop External alarms 1 and 2 log
The maintenance memory associated to these entities contains the occurrences or clearing of
the external alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf.
The external alarms are grouped according to card slot number inside the Shelf equipment:
1=slots 1 to 9; 2=slots 11 to 14.
• Line Internal alarms log
The maintenance memory associated to this entity contains the occurrences or clearing of the
internal alarms of the units equipped in the Line Shelf.
The internal alarms are grouped according to card type.
Moreover the internal alarms log comprises:
– Line Equipment alarms
• Drop Internal alarms log
internal alarms of the units equipped in the Drop Shelf.
The internal alarms are grouped according to card type.
Moreover the internal alarms log comprises:
– Drop Equipment alarms
• Internal alarms log
following alarms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– housekeeping indications
– Equipment synthesis alarms
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 257 / 436
436
Line Performance Monitoring log
In this block the Line Shelf stores the following type of events:

– Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time

(TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration).
Drop Performance Monitoring log
In this block the Drop Shelf stores the following type of events:
– Threshold Cross and Unavailable Time

(TCA Threshold to set in Equipment Configuration and Terminal Points to activate in
Performance Monitoring application).
• Software Faults
In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event:
– defective functions supplied by the software platform. The faults are detected by the
Equipment Controller’s firmware.
• User Command
In the block associated to this entity the NE stores the following type of event:
– manual commands requests issued by the user
– Software downloading commands and information
– Security operations (login, logout, change password).
• Upload Log
In the block associated to this entity, the NE stores the Following type of events:
– events during the upload of Local or Routing Table configuration.

This can happen only during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, when OS
(TMN) is connected.
The relevant unit setting must be executed (see Maintenance Section).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 258 / 436
436
Hence the Group Events and Events must be accessed by selecting them from those indicated on
the screen. Selections must be compatible with Group Entity and Entity selections.
The Maintenance Memory application can be activated by executing the following selections:
• the option ”Application Choice” from the main menu. This selection displays the list of
applications available.
• the option ”Maintenance Memory” from the list of applications available.
Upon selecting the Maintenance Memory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 186. ):
• File
• Receive
• Clear
• Help
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the above described maintenance menu.
General information on the Maintenance Memory product is displayed by clicking on this triangle.
The ”Receive”, ”File” and ”Clear” options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
The ”Help” option displays the description of each Maintenance command.
Figure 186. Maintenance Memory

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 259 / 436
436
4.7.2 Receive Option
The receive option reads the Maintenance Memory data stored inside the N.E.
When the Receive command is selected the following choice is displayed ( see Figure 187. ):

• display – It permits to select and display data
• save as – It permits to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 187. Maintenance Memory – Receive Option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 260 / 436
436
4.7.2.1 Display
Upon selecting this option a new Dialogue Box is displayed (see Figure 188. on page 262).
By means of the Dialog Box a selection criteria is entered on the Maintenance data to be displayed.
The user can choose the Maintenance data by entering the following selections:
• the Group Entity; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group Entity from a
list containing the following items:
– All in this case all the Group Entities are selected;
– Drop External Alarms 1;
– Drop External Alarms 2;
– Drop Internal Alarms;
– Drop PM Log
– Internal Alarms;
– Line External Alarms 1;
– Line External Alarms 2;
– Line Internal Alarms;
– Line PM Log
– Software Faults;
– Upload Log;
– User Command;
• the entity; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Entity from a list containing
the following item:
– All; in this case all the entities of the chosen Group Entity are selected;
– the entities of the chosen Group Entity.
The Group Entity consisting of several entities are:
D Line external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 2 to 13
D Line external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 17 to 23.
D Drop external alarm 1, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 1 to 9
D Drop external alarm 2, which allow to select the external alarms of slot 11 to 14.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 261 / 436
436
• the Group event; by clicking on the associated box the user selects the Group events from a
list containing the item of Table 13. on page 267. The cited table lists the Group Entities to which
they are related.

• the Event; by clicking on the associated box, the user selects the Event from a list containing

the following item:
– All; in this case all the events of the chosen Group Event are selected;
– the events of the chosen Group Event
The most significant Group Events are indicated in Table 14. on page 269.
the choice to display the data stored from the first to the last
or grouped in entity
• the Beginning date and time and the End date and time; all the events chosen between these
two dates are displayed.
Figure 188. Maintenance Memory – Display selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 262 / 436
436
• Example
After having chosen the Line Ext Alarms 1 Group Entity (see Figure 189. ) one of the displayed entities
(see Figure 190. on page 264) can be selected.
After having chosen the 140M Switch Trib Int Alarms Group Event (see Figure 191. on page 264), one of
the displayed events (see Figure 192. on page 265) can be selected.
Figure 193. on page 265 displays the selected events received from the NE after that the user has
executed the Display of Receive Command. To do this, he must click on the OK rectangle.
For each selected event the application displays:
• Group Event name
• Group Entity name
• Entity name
• occurrence (Begin) ”>” symbol on the left of the event row / clearing (End) ”<” of the event
• event date
• event name
Figure 189. Maintenance Memory – Group entity selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 263 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 190. Maintenance Memory – Entity selection
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 191. Maintenance Memory – Group event selection
264 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 193. Maintenance Memory – Display
Figure 192. Maintenance Memory – Event selection
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
265 / 436
4.7.2.2 Save as
Through this choice is created a file containing the Maintenance Memory data displayed.
The files are created with the ”EVT” extension ( see Figure 194. ).

Figure 194. Maintenance Memory – Save File
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 266 / 436
436
Table 13. Group Event List and relevant Group Entity
GROUP EVENT RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY

140M Switch. Trib Ext al. Line External

140M Switch. Trib Int al. Line Internal
2Mb Trib Ext alarms External
2Mb Trib Int alarms Internal
34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Ext al Line External
34/2 and 5 x 2M T. Int al Line Internal
34Mb / 45Mb Trib Ext alarms Line External
34Mb / 45Mb Trib Int alarms Line Internal
ADM 600 IF Ext alarms Drop External
ADM 600 IF Int alarms Drop Internal
ALL All
AUX/EOW Ext alarms Line External
AUX/EOW Int alarms Line Internal
CRU Ext alarms Line External
CRU Int alarms Line Internal
Drop – UAT Drop PM Log
Drop – 15M TCA Drop PM Log
Drop – DAY TCA Drop PM Log
Drop – Equipment alarms Drop Internal
EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Ext al Line External
EI. (electrical) HVC Trib. Int al Line Internal
Fault Log Software fault
FULL MATRIX Ext alarms Line External
FULL MATRIX Int alarms Line Internal
FULL MATRIX AU4 PSE Line External
Housekeeping Ind Internal (NB.1)
Line – 15M TCA Line PM Log
Line – DAY TCA Line PM Log
Line – UAT Line PM Log
Line – Equipment alarms Line Internal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MATRIX : LOP TU12 / TU3 Line External

MATRIX : Prot Switch Event Line External
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 267 / 436
436
GROUP EVENT RELEVANT GROUP ENTITY
MATRIX : RX TU12 / TU3 AIS Line External

MATRIX : Unavailable Path TU12/TU3 Line External

OH Interface Unit Ext. alarms Drop External (not operative)
OH Interface Unit Int. alarms Drop Internal (not operative)
Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Ext al Line External
Op (optical) LVC STM1 Trib. Int al Line Internal
Opt HVC Trib. Ext al Line External
Opt HVC Trib. Int al Line Internal
Security User command (NB.2)
STM16 Agg. Ext alarm Line External
STM16 Agg. Int alarm Line Internal
STM16 Agg. AU4 PSE Line External
STM1–E Module Drop Internal
STM4 Agg. Ext al. Line External
STM4 Agg. Int al. Line Internal
SW DL User Command (NB.3)
Switch Unit Int alarms Line Internal
Synthesis alarms Internal (NB.4)
Upload Upload (NB.5)
User Log User Command (NB.6)
VC4 Matrix Int. Alarm (Connection Card unit) Line Internal
NB.1 – Housekeeping indications memory due to typical station alarms (Environment 1 to 8)
NB.2 – Login, logout, change password on Administrative Application.
NB.3 – Messages indicating failure, ended operations ect. in software downloading operations (for
Factory use.)
NB.4 – Equipment synthesis indications memory, always present at the top of the screens.
NB.5 – Start/End/Aborted upload events, during Equipment Controller substitution with a spare, if
OS(TMN) is connected. Referred only to Local and Routing Table configuration.
NB.6 – Commands in Remote Control operation (Restart, EPS/APS command, etc.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 268 / 436
436
Table 14. Events details
Group Event 2Mb Trib. Int. alarms

Event ALL
Card fail
Card mismatch Typical unit alarm indications ( e.g. 21 x 2Mb/s
Card missing Trib. unit).
Card not responding
Software mismatch
G oup Event
Group e t MATRIX: Prot Switch Event
Event ALL Single
g TU/VC4 on which the p
path p
protection
PSE TU12 1.1.1(TU3 or switching are monitored
TU12)
PSE TU12 2.1.1(TU3
2 1 1(TU3 or U12)
3 1 1(TU3
PSETU12 3.1.1(TU3
orTU12)
PSE TU12 1.2.1 (TU12)
( )
PSE TU12 2.2.1 (TU12)
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
PSE TU12 3.6.3
3 6 3 (TU12)
PSE TU12 1.7.3
1 7 3 (TU12)
PSE TU12 2.7.3
2 7 3 (TU12)
3.7.3
PSE TU12 3 7 3 (TU12)
Group Event Drop Equipment alarms
Event ALL
Conv 1 fail Equipment Alarms relevant to the MAIN-SCREEN

of the DROP SHELF
Conv 2 fail
Fuse broken alarm
Battery Control fail / missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 269 / 436
436
Group Event Line Equipment alarms
Event ALL

Conv 1 fail

Conv 2 fail
Conv 3 fail Equipment Alarms relevant to the MAIN-SCREEN

of the LINE SHELF
ESCT fail
Battery fuse-broken
Threshold Cross
Unavailable time
Prot Switch Event
R-ECT Mode Storing of the local selection "Network/SubneĆ

work" executed in the option VIEW of the Alarm
Synthesis
MNE Connection Storing, on the NE, of the access from a remote

Master NE (when, on the remote, in the option
VIEW of the Alarm Synthesis is selected "NetĆ
work")
OS Main Isolation OS commands
OS Spare Isolation
Switch Over Executed
Switch Back Executed
Switch Over Executed
Switch Back Executed
Group Event Security
Event ALL
Login OK Operator access
Login Fail Operator access
Logout OK Administrative application operations
Change Password OK Administrative application operations
Change Password Fail Administrative application operations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 270 / 436
436
Group Event Synthesis alarms
Event ALL
Housekeeping Ind
Urgent Alarms Indications relevant to the SYNTHESIS which
Not Urgent Alarms is always at the top of the screen.
Alarm Receiving Att
Abnormal Conditions
Access Enable
Indicative Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 271 / 436
436
4.7.3 File option
Upon selecting the ”File” option ( see Figure 195. ) the following choices are displayed:

Open

• Delete
• Print
Figure 195. Maintenance Memory – File option
Open
This choice permits to access the Maintenance Memory files list and select the file required from it
( see Figure 196. ).
By pressing OK the stored data of that file is displayed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 196. Maintenance Memory – Open File
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 272 / 436
436
Delete
This choice permits to delete the current files specified in the list shown in Figure 197.
By pressing OK a request is made to acknowledge the operation ( see Figure 198. ).
Figure 197. Maintenance Memory – Delete File
Figure 198. Maintenance Memory – Acknowledge Delete
Print
This selection permits to Print the Maintenance Memory data. NOT operative.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 273 / 436
436
4.7.4 Clear option
The Clear command cancels all the Maintenance Memory. When selecting this option the screen of
Figure 199. is displayed. The ”global” option permits to clear the whole memory. The ”selective options

allows to clear one of the selected ”entities”. When selecting the global option the screen of Figure 200. on

page 275 is displayed. By clicking key YES clearing is executed and the screen of Figure 201. on page
275 will appear.
If the ”selective” command is selected, the screen of Figure 202. on page 275 is displayed allowing to
delete a specific ”entity” from an ”entity group” . After having selected the memory area to delete click and
select one of the entity groups and entity fields. Click on the OK key to execute the clearing.
Figure 199. Maintenance Memory – Clear Option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 274 / 436
436
Figure 200. Maintenance Memory – Clear acknowledge
Figure 201. Maintenance Memory – Clear OK
Figure 202. Maintenance Memory – Selective clear selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 275 / 436
436
4.8 G784 Performance Monitoring Application
4.8.1 Description

The Performance Monitoring application (P.M.) is used to check the quality of the links on sections and
Path (tributary and aggregate ).
According to the G.826 rec., a Block is defined as a set of consecutive bits associated with a path.
The number of bits within each block depends on the bit rate of the path.
An Errored Block (EB) is defined as a block in which one or more bits are in error.
A Severely Errored Second (SES) is defined as a one second period which contains w 30% errored
blocks or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP).
An SDP is a short time period lasting at least 1 ms or four contiguous blocks , whatever is large, during
which the path is not usable.
For example , a path would be considered unusable if a loss of signal occurs or if all the contiguous blocks
are affected by high bit error ratio (BER) e.g > 10–2 . It is not required to verify this BER by an actual
in–service or out–service measurement.
Table 15. and Table 16. show the thresholds values for SES for the VC paths and for the Section types.
Those values are fixed. If the number of errored blocks exceeds the thresholds given, i.e. the given BER
is reached and overcomed ( w ) then the BE counter stops and the SES counter starts.
Table 15. Thresholds for SES for path types
SDH Path type Monitored byte Thresholds for SES BER

( w 30 %)
VC4 B3 2400 1.59x10–5
VC3 B3 2400 4.9x10–5
VC12 BIP–2 600 2.67x10–4
Table 16. Thresholds for SES for sections types
SDH Section type Monitored byte Thresholds for SES BER

( w 30 %)
STM–16 RS B1 2400 0.96x10–6
STM–16 MS B2 38400 1.54x10–5
STM–4 RS B1 2400 3.85x10–6
STM–4 MS B2 9600 1.54x10–5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
STM–1 RS B1 2400 1.54x10–5
STM–1 MS B2 2400 1.54x10–5
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 276 / 436
436
The Performance Monitoring (P.M.) function allows to:
• enable/disable performance monitoring counters for one network element (NE) supporting the
G.784 and the following:
– G.821
– G.826
• Each NE supports N–th terminal points (TP) classified as:
– For the G.821
• Synchronous multiplex section (SMS),
– For the G.826
• TTP (Trial Termination Points)
– Synchronous path sink (SPS),

– Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB)
– Synchronous multiplex section (SMS),
– Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS)
• CTP (Connection Termination Points)
– Synchronous multiplex section adaptation (MSA)
Each TP has also a hierarchical level:
– STM–16
– STM–4
– STM–1
– VC4
– VC3
– VC12
• display PM information. Two cumulative test periods are suggested for each TP: 15min and 1
day. In the first case, synchronization is carried out at a 00, 15, 30 and 45 min. interval; in the
second case at 12 pm.
• store PM information into a file
• print PM information
The PM function can be activated by selecting the following options:
• ”Application Choice” from the main menu.

This selection displays the list of applications that are available.
• ”G.784 Performance Monitoring” from the list of applications that are available
After these selections a menu is displayed ( Figure 203. ) indicating the following options:
– File
– View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Mode
– Configure
– Help
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 277 / 436
436
These selections are described in the next paragraph.
A small triangle appears on the same line of the above menu, click on it to display overall user product
data.

ATTENTION
When no Terminal Point (TP) has been enabled to the P.M. functions, the screens of the cells are
black.
To obtain the normal screen you should have done the Equipment and the Connection
configurations as described in para. 4.5 on page 73 and enabled the terminal points T.P. as
described in following .
N.B. In case of upgrading from 1651SM to 1661SM–C the ”TP Sink” related to the
Passthroughs will be removed from the TP selection list. It is necessary a restart of the
Equipment Controller.
Figure 203. G.784 Performance Monitoring
In order to enable the T.P. operations must be executed according to the options detailed below and in
the following order:
• Through option MODE choose the TPs to be enabled or not by means of the START/STOP
selections.
• Through option MODE choose whether to display in periods of days or quarters of an hour
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Through the CONFIGURATION option select the thresholds of the single TPs’ counters.
Displayed data (color or symbols) depends on these counters and thresholds.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 278 / 436
436
• Through option VIEW choose to display only the faulty TPs or all the TPs among those that have
been enabled.
• Through option MODE proceed to automatically or manually verify:

– in automatic mode the results are displayed on the screen;
– in manual mode the results are obtained by entering command READ. They can be
deleted through command CLEAR.
• If necessary, store in a file or print through option FILE.
ATTENTION : if the G.784 P.M. application is already active, when enable a new TP, created by a
change in Equipment and Connection Configuration, it is previously necessary to
activate it, entering the READ command
The structure of the main P.M. screen is explained in the following (see Figure 204. on page 280):
• The top row shows the date (on the left) and the cumulative periods expressed either in days
(D0 to D31) or in quarters of an hour (99 max.). D0 stands for the current day.
• On the first column, at the left, are indicated the names of the 5 TPs to display. Only 5 TPs can
be displayed at the same time, and to see the one above or below move the cursor up and down
accordingly.
• The TP counters are synthesized within a fixed period in cells 27 to 66. For example, cell 66
synthesizes TP ”VC4 TTP sink Trib–2” counter values on D7. It is called ”synthesis of counter
values” because each TP is provided with different counters which have their own value. The
latter is associated to a monitor.
By clicking on one of the TPs (cells on the left) the screen of Figure 205. on page 281 can be
displayed (second level). The latter details the relevant counters.
Click on ”time” to display the value of the counters (Figure 206. on page 281, third level).
After having displayed Figure 205. on page 281 and Figure 206. on page 281
click on and on ”close” to return to the previous figure.
Note that each cell shows the worst synthesis of the counters involved.
• Cells 1 to 5 show the worst–case synthesis time (latest) of the first cell displayed on the left.
Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row).
• Cells 6 to 10 show the worst–case synthesis of the ”least current” times of the last cell displayed
on the right.
Each cell refers to the relevant TP (same row).
• Cells 11 to 18 show the worst–case synthesis of all the TP’s above the 5 displayed in the same
time interval (same column).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Cells 19 to 26 show the worst–case synthesis of all the TP’s under the 5 displayed in the same
time interval (same column).
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 279 / 436
436
Alarm Syntesis
View Bell Application_Choice..... History Help
1651 SM EF DF AT UG NG HI IN AC TC AE DC LC
G.784 Performance Monitoring 1651SM – Manual

File View Mode Configure Help
14/03/95 D–0 D–1 D–2 D–3 D–4 D–5 D–6 D–7
Above : 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
msTTPsink
TRSTm1–2 1 27 28 – – – – – 34 6
vc4TTPsink 4 AGGE 2 35 – – – – 40 – 42 7
vc4TTPsink 2 AGGW 3 43 – – – – – – 50 8
vc4TTPsink 4 AGGW 4 51 – – – – – – 58 9
vc4TTPsink TRIB–2 5 59 – – – – – – 66 10
Under : 2 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Figure 204. G784 Performance Monitoring. Screen interpretation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 280 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 206. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s value
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 205. G784 Performance Monitoring TP’s synthesis
281 / 436
After having activated the Performance Monitoring screens, each screen assumes a color (or background
motif if the screen is monochromatic) in relation to the measurement result.
Table 17. lists the possible results; an example of the result is shown in Figure 207.

No colour or symbol can be displayed unless an operative command has been entered (Read in Manual
mode or Automatic mode).
Table 17. Relationship between colours (motifs) and measurement result.
Measurement results Square
Color Motif
No measurement Light blue

No error Green
ÍÍ
Loss of data White
ÍÍ
ÀÀ
Under the low level Magenta
Between low and high level Yellow
ÀÀ
ÁÁ
Above the high level Red
ÁÁ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 207. G784 Performance Monitoring Example of result (Quarter)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 282 / 436
436
4.8.2 File option
This option ( see Figure 208. ) allows the user to:
•
save error counters in a file

• print error counter values
Figure 208. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option
Save
This choice ( see Figure 209. ) allows to save counter values, of currently started TP’s, in a file.
A dialog box asks to enter a filename to save data. The files are created with the .CNT extension.
Figure 209. G784 Performance Monitoring. Save File
Print
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
This choice allows to print error counter values. A dialog box allows to stop printing when in progress.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 283 / 436
436
4.8.3 View option
This option ( see Figure 210. ) allows the user to:

display all selected TP’s (ALL option)

• display only error affected selected TP’s (error option).
Figure 210. G784 Performance Monitoring. View option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 284 / 436
436
4.8.4 Mode option
This option allows to display the following list of commands ( Figure 211. on page 286):
•
Auto
• Manual
• Day
• Quarter
• Start
• Clear
• Stop
• Read
AUTO
Through this command the counter AUTOMATIC read mode is selected. Data is immediately displayed
and updated on the screen every 15 minutes.
The commands CLEAR and READ are not enabled.
MANUAL
Through the manual mode all the commands must be activated by an operator. The READ command is
manually entered to display and read–out the relative counters’ data.
The command READ will be described in the following. The values will be updated only after that the READ
command has been entered again. Previously stored data is also displayed.
DAY
This command allows to select the data displayed and gathered in a one day period.
The date appears at the top left of the screen (as in Figure 203. on page 278 ).
Data detected over a 32 days period (max.) is displayed, when the Craft Terminal is connected; on the
contrary only two days before the current one are displayed.
AUTOMATIC Column D0 displays data inherent to the current day with automatic
updating every 15 minutes (the data is displayed only after midnight). Columns D1 to D31
display data inherent to the previous 31 days if it takes more than one day to verify. At midnight,
D0 will contain data of the new day while that present before midnight is stored in D1. This is
also applicable for data in D1 to D30.
MANUAL Column D0 displays data prior to 12 p.m. up to the execution of the

MANUAL option through command READ. Data stored two days before is also received from
the NE and displayed in columns D1 and D2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 285 / 436
436
QUARTER
This command allows to select data displayed and gathered over a one quarter of an hour period (as
in Figure 207. on page 282). These 15mins. periods are displayed at the top of the screen. A max. of 97

quarters of an hour can be displayed only with a CT connected. Otherwise we will have only 17 periods

of 15 mins displayed.
AUTOMATIC The data of the last full 15 mins. is displayed (in the cell on the left
associated with the first quarter of an hour). Data is updated every 15 minutes and the value
of the previously stored quarter of an hour moves to the right. If it takes longer to verify, several
”15mins. periods” values will be present.
MANUAL The first quarter of an hour on the left refers to the value present while
executing the MANUAL option through command READ. The cells on the right contain the data
of the previously stored 16 quarters (15mins. periods) also received from the NE
With regard DAY and QUARTER, click on to move to the first and last time periods .
By clicking on you move one day or one quarter of an hour ahead. In this manner data
detected at different periods of the day (s) or quarter (s) is displayed.

In the AUTOMATIC mode data is updated even if accessing the MANUAL mode. It can be interrupted
by signing off the application only.
Figure 211. G784 Performance Monitoring. Mode option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 286 / 436
436
Start
This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently stopped (disabled) TP’s, to allow the user to
select the termination points to start–on (enabled). See Figure 212. Following ”Start” execution the
currently started TP’s are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen).
P.M. data on the TP’s is obtained only if activated by the N.E. (e.g., must be equipped, connected, etc.).
Stop
This command displays a dialog box with a list of currently started (enabled) TP’s, to allow the user to select
the termination points to be stopped (disabled). The screen is similar as that of Figure 212. Following
”Stop” execution the currently started TP’s are displayed on the list (left side of the main screen).
Read
This command is available in manual mode only. It allows to read counters on selected TP’s.
The new values of the counters are displayed after executing the Read command.
Clear
This command allows to clear selected TP counters inside the NE (MANUAL MODE ONLY) After ”Clear”
selection the currently started TP’s are displayed. The counters of the selected TP’s are cleared.
Figure 212. G784 Performance Monitoring. TP selection (start, stop)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 287 / 436
436
4.8.5 Configure option
It represents the possible Performance Monitoring types to which the TP’s can be associated.
The following can be selected ( Figure 213. on page 291 ):

• Plesio Path (not operative)
• Plesio Line (not operative)
• Wdm fec sink (not operative)
• G.821
• G.826
Selecting G.826 another window will be opened showing the possible types of monitoring (see
Figure 214. on page291 )
– Synchronous path sink (SPS)
– Synchronous path bidirectional (SPB)
– Synchronous multiplex section (SMS)
– Synchronous element regeneration section (SERS)
– Synchronous multiplexer section adaptation (MSA)
The dialog box for each option allows the user to configure TPs by entering new criteria threshold values
associated to each counter.
Two threshold values are provided:
• LOW
• HIGH
Colours stated in Table 17. on page 282 concern this selection.
Synch path sink
This command allows to change the two counters’ thresholds for synchronous path sink (see
Figure 215. on page 291 ).
Calculation is made on BIP8 of VC4 (B3) or VC3 (B3) or BIP2 of VC12 (V5)
The counters provided are:
• BBE – Background block error
• ES – Errored second
• SES – Severely errored seconds
• C SES – Not Operative

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• UAS – Unavailability seconds
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 288 / 436
436
Synch path bid
This command allows to change the two counter’s thresholds for synchronous path bidirectional.
Calculation is made on the same BIP of the SPS, this time on both side of the path.
BBE – Background Block Error
ES – Errored Second
SES – Severely Errored Second
BBE FE – Background Block Error on FAR END equipment
ES FE – Errored Second on FAR END equipment
SES FE – Severely Errored Second on FAR END equipment
UAS BIDI – Sum of Unavailability Second on both the direction of the path (Local and FAR END
equipment)
Synch mux sect (for G.826)
To set the thresholds of the Synch Mux Section According to the G.826 Recommandation, the
menu:
G.821 > Sync Mux Sect
must be opened. The meanings of the counters is intended according to G.826.
This command allows to change the two counters’ thresholds for synchronous multiplex section.
Calculation is made on BIP24 (STM1), 4x24 (STM4) and 16 x 24 (STM16) of byte B2 on both side of the
section.
The counters are provided are:
• ER– is intended as Background block error
• CSES–Not operative

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 289 / 436
436
Synch Elem Reg Sect
This command allows to change the two counter’s thresholds for Synchronous Element Regeneration
Section.

Calculation (first five counters) is made only on BIP8 of the STM4 and STM16 (byte B1 of the aggregates).

OOFS is counted on all STM1 / STM4 / STM16.
• BBE – Background block error
• C SES – Not Operative
• OOFS – Out Of Frame Seconds – Counted on A1–A2 bytes
Synch Mult Sect Adapt
This command allows to change all the two counter’s thresholds for Synchronous Multiplex Section
Adaptation.
Calculation is made on AUOH justification.
The counter provided is:
• PJ – Pointer justification (positive and negative)
VALUES TO ASSIGNE ON THE LOW AND HIGH THRESHOLDS:
– An example of correct values to assigne,for STM1 level and QUARTER period is:
LOW HIGH
• BBE 58 (]10–9 ) 5790 (]10–7 )
• ES 50 150
• SES 15 60
• UAS 15 60
• PJ 1000 20000
For STM4, BBE values must be multiplexed by 4.
For STM16, BBE values must be multiplexed by 16.
For DAY period multiplex by 4 and by 24.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 290 / 436
436
Figure 213. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Configure option
Figure 214. G784 Performance Monitoring. G826 options
Figure 215. G.784 Performance Monitoring. Changing error criteria, SPS.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 291 / 436
436
4.8.6 Termination point description
The TP’s for each type of unit, as regards to type and hierarchical level are described in the following
tables. The ”type” and ”hierarchical level” indications are displayed at the top of the day and quarters of

an hour indications ( see Figure 205. on page 281 ).

Table 18. STM16 Aggregate
TP’s NAME TP’s TYPE Hierarchical level
ms TTP bid AGGE/W Synch mux sect (SMS) STM16 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink AGGE/W Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM16 ( RSOH )
vc4 TTP sink n AGGE/W Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1, NB2.
au4 CTP n AGGE/W Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM16 ( AUOH )
NB1, NB3
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals.
NB2: For pass–through connections, VC4 ”n” is the number selected in Equip. Configuration;
for other connections (drop/insert,cross–connection,drop) there are ”n” VC4 for ”n”signals
(max 8).
NB3: ”n” is the number of the AU4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
Table 19. STM4 Aggregate
TP’s NAME TP’s TYPE Hierarchical level
ms TTP bid AGGE/W A/B Synch mux sect (SMS) STM4 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink AGGE/W A/B Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM4 ( RSOH )
vc4 TTP sink n AGGE/W A/B Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1, NB2
au4 CTP n AGGE/W A/B Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM4 ( AUOH )
NB1, NB3
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals. Not active for Spare Aggregate.
NB2: there are ”n” VC4 for ”n” connections (max 4).
NB3: ”n” is the number of the au4 selected in the Equipment configuration application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 292 / 436
436
Table 20. Optical HVC STM–1 Tributary and Electrical STM–1 Switch Tributary
TP’s name TP’s type Hierarchical level

ms TTP bid TRIB 1 to 8 Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
rs TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 Synch elem reg sect (SERS) STM1 ( RSOH ).
Only OOFS is operative
vc4 TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1 Insert side
vc4 CTP sour TRIB 1to 8 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1 Drop side
au4 CTP TRIB 1 to 8 – NB1 Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross
Connection
Table 21. Optical LVC STM–1 Tributary
ms TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
vc4 TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1 Insert side
au4 CTP TRIB 1 to 8 – NB1 Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: active only for NOT STRUCTURED signals and with configuration different from Cross
Connection
Table 22. APS 1+1 Spare. All STM1 Tributaries (NB1)
ms TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 Synch mux sect (SMS) STM1 ( MSOH )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NB1; for EPS spare TP’s are not enabled.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 293 / 436
436
Table 23. Tributary 140Mb/s

vc4 TTP bid TRIB 1 to 8 – NB1 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink TRIB 1 to 8 – NB2 Synch path sink (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
NB1: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Bidirectional Cross Connection
NB2: active when configurated as Drop or Unidirectional Cross Connection
Table 24. Tributary 3x34 Mb/s and 3x45 Mb/s
Table 25. Tributary 21x 2 Mb/s
Table 26. Tributary 34/2–5 x 2 Mb/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 294 / 436
436
Table 27. Full Matrix (NB1)

vc4 TTP bid n AGGE/W– NB2 Synch path bidir (SPB) VC4 ( POH )
vc4 TTP sink n AGGE/W – NB3 Synch path sect (SPS) VC4 ( POH )
au4 CTP n AGGE/W Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM4/16 ( AUOH )
au4 CTP TRIB 1 to 8 Synch mux sect adapt (MSA) STM1 ( AUOH )
NB1: TP’s active only for STRUCTURED signals
NB2: active when configurated as Drop/Insert or Cross Connection
NB3: active when configurated as Drop
NB4: active when configurated as Insert

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 295 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
296 / 436
4.9 Software Download Application
This application permits to update the equipment SW (ESCT and Card Controllers) from the Craft
Terminal. Download is executed during regular equipment operation (in–service) and consists of the
following phases:
• SW download
• SW download activation
The Software Download procedure is activated by clicking on the ”Software Download” label in the
”Application choice” ( see Figure 216. ).
Figure 217. on page 298 shows the first screen of the software download menu; by clicking on it
Figure 218. on page 298 will appear. The latter represents a window with the following alternatives:
• SW downloading: Configuration and execution of the Software Downloading
• Software: Information on the SW loaded in the NE. Activate the downloaded SW on the NE
should if not already selected.
• Server Identification: This allows to select the equipment Craft Terminal as ”Server”.
The chosen window and the screen selected from it are shown in the flow–chart of Figure 219. on page
299. The figure shows how to reach some ”informative” screens from different start options.
This information can also be useful in the description that follows.
Figure 216. Software Download selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 297 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 218. Software Download Menu
Figure 217. Software Download main screen
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
298 / 436
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU

SW SERVER
DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD SW SW SW
PROGRESS INFORMATION MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONALITIES
SW SW SW
DOWNLOADING MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONALITIES
SERVER SW
IDENTIFICATION ACTIVATION
ACTIVATE
D.L. COMMITTED
EXECUTE UNCOMMITTED
DOWNLOAD SW
PROGRESS INFORMATION
PROGRAM EXECUTION
DESCRIPTOR
FILE
CHOICE OPTIONS
SCREENS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 219. Download flow chart
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 299 / 436
436
4.9.1 SW downloading
Figure 220. on page 301 is obtained by clicking on the ”SW Download” label on Figure 218. on page 298,
and shows two alternatives:

• Download: to execute and check the DL activity
• Download progress: to follow the continuation of DL already running
Figure 221. on page 301 will appear by clicking on the ”Download” label indicated in Figure 220. on page
301, and show the following fields:
• NE identification
• Download attributes
• SW package selection
• NE type
The identification field name and type are automatically received by the NE from the equipment.
By clicking next to the relative label on the ”Download Attribute” field, the following commands must be
inserted:
• Code present: it must be always set.
• Implicit activation: if set, the NE will automatically activate the new SW after successful
download. If not set, the NE will store the new SW (uncommitted) without activating it (the
equipment works with the previous SW).
• The activation of the new SW can be made in a second time, (”Software” and ”SW
Management” option) as described further on.
• Forced Download: it causes current equipment SW download on all the units including the units
that have been previously updated.
If not activated, only the units of a previous release will be downloaded.
The NE type field displays (default) the name of the equipment with its Release number (e.g.: ”1651SM
25”) . This one must be replaced with the ” 1651SM ” indication. The following field will appear:
SW package selection indicating all equipment SW packages available, i.e., those that have been installed
on the Craft Terminal.
N.B. To prevent possible errors all DOWNLOAD and ACTIVATION operations of new SW
version, must be performed when the MAIN card of all EPS and all the MAIN side of SNCP
configurations are ACTIVES.
N.B. The Backward Download or Backward Activation of SW versions, must be done only with
UNIT congruent with those SW Versions, otherwise the Equipment and Connection
Configurations will be erased and therefor they have to be sent again.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 300 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 221. SW Downloading
Figure 220. SW Downloading choice
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
301 / 436
By clicking on the requested software package, the ”Download” command will be available at the bottom
left of the screen.
Press the Download button to delete the confirmation window, and display the ”Download Progress”
window ( see Figure 222. ).

The number and percentage of files loaded are indicated along with the download operation in progress.
A message will indicate that download is terminated.
To interrupt the downloading procedure select ”Abort”. Confirmation screens will be presented to the
operator. By selecting the ”Close” key, Figure 217. on page 298 will be displayed again.
The ”Download Progress” screen can also be accessed by clicking on the ”Download Progress” option
(Figure 220. on page 301) if download is running.
The operator can access to the ”SW Package Information” (see para. ”Software information” on page 303)
and the ”Server Identification functions” (see para. ”Server Identification” on page 309 ) as specified in
Figure 221. on page 301
The ”SW Package Information” can also be accessed from ”Download progress” (Figure 222. on page
302).
Figure 222. Download in Progress

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 302 / 436
436
4.9.1.1 Software information
Figure 223. can be accessed through different screens. The following fields are displayed:
•
NE identification
• Committed/Uncommitted SW Package
• Detailed SW information
The ”NE identification” field states the NE’s name and type received from the equipment.
The ”Committed SW Package” and ”Uncommitted SW Package” fields are the two memory banks. One
bank contains the active equipment software while the other may contain eventual previous SW version.
(e.g. enabled but not active).
The SW status is specified by the following parameters:
• Enabled: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package has been loaded and can be activated
• Active: a cross (X) indicates that the SW package is active and that the equipment is operating
with the software indicated
• Under download indicates that the relevant SW package is being downloaded (transitory
status).
The ”Detailed SW information” field gives the following information:
• Committed package, if selected, permits to display the ”Descriptor File” of the active equipment
memory bank.
• Uncommitted package if selected,permits to display the ”Descriptor File” of the memory bank
available for another SW version.
The lower side of the ”Detailed SW Information” field can be displayed by entering the ”Descriptor File”
key ( see para. ”Descriptor file” on page 304 ).
By selecting the ”Cancel” key the initial screens are re–presented ( Figure 223. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 223. SW Information
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 303 / 436
436
4.9.1.2 Descriptor file
This function is used to obtain information on the SW package that has been loaded on the Network
Element and the SW units contained in Figure 224. shows both the Committed and Uncommitted software

packages. Table 28. explains the meaning of symbols and acronyms.

Figure 224. Description File
Table 28. Descriptor file
DESCRIPTOR FILE
SW PACKAGE : 1651 SM REL.2.4.8
– Software package name
– Software package release version: V.2.4.8
– Alcatel Identifier: ALCATEL ID
– Network equipment type: 1651 SM
– Software unit decimal number: 1 ––> 208. The following definition list is given for each SW unit:
– BSUD # : ASCII string where # may mean 1 ––> 208
– Software unit name: AUX C01 EXE (ex.)
– Software unit release version: V.2.8.1 (ex.)
– Alcatel Identifier: ALCA AUX (ex.)
– Software unit type: S (specific format value)
– Binary format name: IEFE 695 (Std)
– File length: 66656 (ex.)
– List of type of compatible cards: ”*” character
– Processor unit identifier: PU AUX (ex.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– ESUD# string: ASCII string where # may mean 1 ––> 208
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 304 / 436
436
4.9.2 Software
Figure 225. indicates the chosen window related to this function:
•
SW Information (Figure 223. on page 303 is displayed)

• SW Management (see para. ”SW Management” on page 306 )

• SW functionalities (see para ”SW functionalities” on page 308 )
Figure 225. Software menù

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 305 / 436
436
4.9.2.1 SW Management
This function is accessed by the ”SW management” option of the ”Software download” menu
(Figure 225. on page 305). It is used to activate the software packages (loaded on the NE) through the

window of Figure 226. on page 307 showing the following fields:

– NE identification (NE name and type received from the equipment), .
– ”Committed SW package” along with its status (Enabled, Active, Under down load). Indicates the SW
contained in the main memory bank.
– ”Uncommitted SW package” along with their status (Enabled, Active, Under download). Indicates the
SW contained in the main memory bank. In this case it cannot be ”active”.
The SW contained can be:
• A new downloaded SW, but without ”implicit activation”.

• The previous SW after a new Software Download.
– In the ”ACTIONS” field only the ”ACTIVATE” command can be accessed. This command permits
to display the screen of Figure 227. on page 307.
The ”Commit” and ”Revert Back” commands are not enabled; command ”CANCEL” permits to return to
the selection labels on the main menu (Figure 217. on page 298).
By clicking on the ”SW package information” label at the bottom of this screen ”SW information” (para.
”Software information” on page 303) is also displayed on it.
The SW package indicated in the ”SW Package selection” field (which may be ”Committed or
Uncommitted package”) is activated through the window shown in Figure 227. on page 307.
On the Uncommitted Package bank is stored a spare SW. With this screen is possible to activate it. In this
case the previously ”Committed” (enabled) becomes ”Uncommitted”. passing on the spare bank.
It will be possible activate it again (always by means the SW activation screen) without repeat the complete
SW Download Procedure.
The ”Activation Attribute” field is not enabled.

Click on the ”Cancel” key to display Figure 226. on page 307 again. Click on ”Activate” an intermediate
screen appears informing that the connection between NE and OS is likely to be interrupted.
By clicking on the ”OK” key a further message is displayed indicating ”Activation in progress” i.e., the
message indicates that activation has been successfully completed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 306 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 227. SW Activation
Figure 226. SW Management
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
307 / 436
4.9.2.2 SW functionalities
The SW functions that can be used in the current SW DL version are those distinguished by a cross (X)
in the list of Figure 228. , i.e.:

• Forced download: selection of complete download or just units to update
• SW package descriptor: list of the SW package contents supplied to the operator
• Code present: always to be selected
• Implicit activation: automatic activation at the end of download or new SW storing only, to
activate in future operations (SW Management).
• 2 memory banks: management of both memory banks
Figure 228. SW functionalities

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 308 / 436
436
4.9.2.3 Server Identification
This function is used to select the type of NE Server (see Figure 229. )
The operator must always select: ECT.

The Network address field can be selected if ” Server on OS for QB3* NEs” or ” Server on OS for TCP/IP
NE’s” is implemented in the local management.
Figure 229. Server identification

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 309 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
310 / 436
4.10 Remote Inventory Application
4.10.1 Description
Through this application it is displayed the data inserted in the unit’s Remote Inventory.
In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data ect.
Data is displayed in specific fields:
• Company
It indicates the Company’s (Alcatel’s branch) which design the unit.
Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation’s meaning (four characters).
• Unit Type
It indicates the units’ acronym
• Unit Part Number

It indicates Alcatel or Factory product’s Part No.. The number indicated is that printed on the
labels or on the units’ front coverplates.
• Serial Number
It indicates the product’s serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm.
• Software Part Number

It indicates the id. of the unit’s resident software
• CLEI Code
It indicates the CLEI (Common Language Equipment Identification) code according to BellCore
specs. TR–ISD–325
• Manufacturing plant
It indicates the Company’s manufacturing plant id. within the company, producing the unit.
Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation’s meaning (four characters).
• Date identifier
It indicates the meaning of the date that follow.
It is a two–digit code supplying the following information:
00 date of construction at the time of final testing

01 production order data
02 construction date of the unit lot
03 date product has been forwarded to customer
04 customer order date
• Date (YYMMDD)
The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When only
the year is displayed, the format must be ”YY– – – – ”
The Remote Inventory Application can be activated by selecting:
• the option ”Application choice” from the main menu. This selection displays the list of the
application available.
• the option ”Remote Inventory” from the list of the application available
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 311 / 436
436
When selecting the Remote Inventory option the following menu is displayed (see Figure 230. ):
• file

receive

• help
A small triangle is displayed on the same line of the Remote Inventory menu and , if clicked, general
information is displayed on the Remote Inventory product.
The ”Receive” and ”File” options are detailed in the paragraphs that follow.
The ”Help” option details each Remote Inventory command.
Figure 230. Remote inventory
N.B. Note that the data relevant to the Spare AGG W are stored as pertaining to the Spare AGG E
and vice versa.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 312 / 436
436
4.10.2 Receive Option
The Receive option reads the Remote Inventory data stored in the unit. When the Receive command is
selected the following choice is displayed (see Figure 231. )
• display – to select and display data
• save as – to create the files containing the displayed data
Figure 231. Remote inventory – Receive option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 313 / 436
436
Display
When selecting this option, a new Dialogue box is displayed (see Figure 232. ).
Use is made of the dialogue box to enter a selection criteria on the remote inventory data to be displayed.

The user can choose the Remote Inventory data by entering the following selection:

First block – Last block
To display a unit remote inventory first select the unit through the above fields.
Each unit has its own id. number representing the slot assigned to it inside the mechanical structure of
the LINE SHELF (0....25) and for the DROP SHELH (26....47).
Note that the slot number starts with ”0” while in the AS&C application the slot number starts with ”1”.
If the same number is entered in both blocks, only one unit will be selected. By entering different numbers
an operative field will be selected comprising several units.
The default values: 0 and 47 select all the unit.
Further Selection
Within the ”first block–last block” it is possible, through the remaining fields (see definition stated in
previous chapt.), to display only the unit (s) whose data are specified in the fields by the operator (data
must be already known).
This operation is useful if an operating field comprising several units has already been selected.
Figure 232. Remote inventory – Display selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 314 / 436
436
Once the selection has been completed, if press key ”Cancel” return to the previous screen (see
Figure 231. on page 313 ) thereby cancelling all the selection made.
Press key OK to display the screen of Figure 233.
This screen reports the data stored on the Remote Inventory of the selected units.
The first part of this screen (Display Filtering) concerns the selections made, the rest, besides the block
number id. of each unit, reports the following data:
ELEMENT IDENTIFICATION
• Company
• Unit type
• Unit Part Number
• Software Part Number
• CLEI code
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
• Manufacturing plant
• Serial number
• Date
Figure 233. Remote inventory – Display

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 315 / 436
436
Save as
Files are created through the application with the .rur extension (see Figure 234. )
They contain the Remote Inventory data displayed.

Figure 234. Remote inventory – Save file
4.10.3 File Option
When selecting the file option (see Figure 235. ) the following choices are displayed:
• open
• delete
• print
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 235. Remote inventory – File option
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 316 / 436
436
Open
This choice provides access to the Remote Inventory list and allows to select the file required from it
(see Figure 236. ) Press OK to display the stored data of the selected file.
Figure 236. Remote Inventory–Open File
Delete
This choice allows to delete the current file specified on the list shown in Figure 237.
Press OK to request operation acknowledgement (see Figure 238. )
Figure 237. Remote Inventory–Delete File
Figure 238. Remote Inventory–Delete Acknowledge

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Print
This Option is not available
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 317 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
318 / 436
4.11 Mediation Function applications
The Mediation Function is present when it is necessary to manage non–SDH equipment by means of Q2
interface.
The network with Q2 Mediation Function must be created following the description at para 4.12 on page
329.
Double click on the second line appearing on the screen an representing the mediation function : it is
possible to access the applications with the login of Figure 239. on page 319, indicating the need for the
operator identifier and password.
Then the ”Application Choice ” list of Figure 241. on page 320 appears.
The available applications for the Q2 interface of the SDH equipment, described in the next paragraphs
are those reported in Figure 241. on page 320.
For each non–SDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window.
Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications.
For the Applications description refer to the relevant handbook.
Figure 239. Operator identifier and password

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 319 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 240. Mediation Function selection
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 241. Alarm synthesis – Application choice for Mediation Function
320 / 436
4.11.1 Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application
The Figure 242. represent the alarms, status and control application screen
The screen shows the status of the two Operative Systems (if any) , indicating which one ( the ”OS Main”
or the ”OS Spare” ) is managing the Mediation Function of the NE.
At the top of the AS&C screen a label string indicates general alarms information referred to the Mediation
Function of the NE. Only the AE and the OS isolation alarms are active .The OS severity is fixed to NG,
therefore the AT, UG and IND alarms are meaningless.
The alarm meaning is indicated in Table 9. on page 190.
Figure 242. Mediation Function: alarms, status and control application

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 321 / 436
436
4.11.2 Mediation Function: local configuration application
This application is used to configure the data necessary to manage the NE with Q2 interface.

The Figure 243. shows the list of the local configuration table.

• OS configuration table
• Local Q2 interface definition
• Slave NE address configuration table
Each of the above table will be detailed in the paragraphs that follows.
Figure 243. Mediation Function: local configuration application list

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 322 / 436
436
4.11.2.1 OS configuration table
The screen of Figure 244. is dedicated to the MAIN and SPARE OS Local Address.
The OS configuration of the mediation function is independent from the one of the transport equipment,
so the addresses of the two OS of the Mediation Function can be different from those of the transport part.
Up to 4 OS in total can be present.
• The OS NSAP address is composed by:
– Area address
– System ID
At the bottom of the screen the table defines the switch condition between Main and Spare OS:
• enable / disable the Automatic Switch – Over
• enable / disable Automatic Switch – Back
The ”switch over” option set at Yes enables the spare OS connection when the main OS is no more active.
If the main OS returns to the active status and the switch back parameter is set to Yes , the dialogue switch
to the main OS.
The ”switch over” parameter to no, prevents the spare OS connection in case of OS main connection
failure.
The ”switch back” option set to no prevents the switch between spare and main OS from being revertive.
It is suggested to insert a different Area Address for the OS if the GOSIP V2 format is used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 244. Mediation Function: OS configuration table
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 323 / 436
436
4.11.2.2 Local Q2 interface definition
The screen of Figure 245. permits to set the following data for the Mediation Function interface:

Line Speed: select the value from the list on the right.

– For Q2 synchronous intermediate system the line speed is fixed at 19200 bit/s
– For RQ2 asynchronous intermediate system the line speed is selectable
• Intermediate System: select between Q2 (synchronous ) or RQ2 ( asynchronous ) protocols

depending on the type of connected Q2 NE.
Figure 245. Mediation Function: Local Q2 interface definition

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 324 / 436
436
4.11.2.3 Slave NE address configuration table
The non–SDH equipment with Q2 interface of the network are selected with the screen of Figure 246.
Figure 246. Mediation Function: NE selection
The total capacity of a single NE ( i.e. maximum number of Q2 elements that a Q2 interface can manage)
is :
• physical load : max 32 physical addresses
• logical load : max 128 logical addresses ( 7.1 )
So , to a physical address , can correspond more than one logical address. depending on the type of Q2
NE.
Restriction : the memory required to store the alarm retrieved from each Q2 NE is 25 kbyte in total.
Therefore , due to the different weight of the various type of Q2 NE, the max number of Q2 NE managed
can be less than 128.
For each non–SDH equipment it is available a proper string in the Alarm Synthesis window.
Clicking on the equipment name on the string it is possible to access to the relevant Applications.
N.B. To be able to open a remote session on a Q2 NE , the Craft Terminal SWP of the Q2 NE must
be installed on the same directory in which NECTAS has been installed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 325 / 436
436
The table of Figure 248. on page 327 allows the user to configure the slave NE. The table contains 128
entries, each of them describing one slave NE. For each entry the user can configure the following
information:

• 7.1 Address ( logical address ). The same value of the ”Secondary Address” of the Network

configuration (para. 4.12 on page 329) must be inserted.
• NE enable.
• Address Q2 ( physical address ). It is the physical address of the Q2 link (values from 1 to 254)
A max of 32 different Q2 addresses can be had
• Mode. Select between ”Standard” or ”Enhanced” protocol.
If a non SDH equipment is connected to a FOX Q2 interface, the FOX tributary number and the pertaining
CPE that are involved must be declared.
The ”None” selection is used if the non SDH equipment is connected to the ADM’s Q2 .
A NE can house up to 3 FOX tributaries ; each tributary can be connected to a maximum of 3 CPE.
The sum of the non SDH equipment handled by an ADM (Q2/RQ2 NE connected to the ADM plus Q2/RQ2
NE connected to the CPE) can not exceed 128. ( see Restriction above )
The configurations referred to the FOX CPE are not operative in this release.
Figure 247. Mediation function: Slave NE address configuration Table

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 326 / 436
436
The table of Figure 248. allows the user to configure the slave NE. The table contains 32 entries, each
of them describing one slave NE. For each entry the user can configure the following information:
• 7.1 Address. The same value of the ”Secondary Address” of the Network configuration (para.
4.12 on page 329) must be inserted.

• NE enable.
• Address Q2. It is the physical address of the Q2 link (values from 1 to 254)
• Mode. Select between ”Standard” or ”Enhanced” protocol.
Figure 248. Mediation Function: Slave NE address configuration table
4.11.3 Mediation Function: administrative application
The Administrative application is used for the station operators management.
It is the same application described at para. 4.4 on page 66 for the NE.
The contents of the Administrative application is shared between the Mediation Function and the NE so
that changes operated in this point modify also the content of the application at para 4.4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 327 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
328 / 436
4.12 Network Configuration For Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation
Function
This procedure is suitable to create a new network representation if dealing with a Remote Craft Terminal.
The existing networks, if any , created by the operator using previous 1641SM and NECTAS software
release , are compatible with the current equipment and NECTAS releases.
To graphically activate an existing Network :
• NECTAS must be correctly loaded ( see para. 3.2 on page 353 )
• specify the name of the existing local network as NECTAS parameter ( see 4.12.4 on page 341)
4.12.1 Configuration Procedure for Adm Networks Handled By Remote Craft Terminal
By means of the R–ECT/R–EACT software packages it is possible to handle an ADM network of 32 NEs
including the one considered as master, i.e. the one on which the R–ECT sw is mounted.
The other NEs must support the R–ECT sw but it is not necessary to install this package on them if the
NE is not configured as master: it is enough the ECT or EACT sw package .
The following procedure permits to :
• create a graphical representation of the network involved
• configure each NE through the Local Configuration application
Before creating the network representation:
– close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATION tools if opened.
– in the WIN. ini file section PEX , verify the presence of the string
– NETCFG_RECT=YES
This string should be present if NECTAS ≥3.77 has been properly installed , i.e if the R–ECT function
has been enabled when installing the management software.
It is mandatory to install NECTAS rel. ≥3.77 with the 1651SM rel. 2.5
If the string present is NETCFG_RECT=NO , modify it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 329 / 436
436
4.12.2 How to create the network
One of the following procedures must be performed in order to enable R–ECT function activation:

creation of a graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels –

Figure 249. )
• Creation of a network with NEs names defined but without graphical support (Figure 250. on
page 331 )
• Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and without equipment’s label
(Figure 251. on page 331 )
The following figures are examples of the three ways of working .
Figure 249. Graphical network ( background map with equipment located and labels )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 330 / 436
436
Figure 250. Network with NEs names defined (first column)
Figure 251. Remote craft terminal activation without a graphical support and equipment’s label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In the first column of Figure 251. the NEs are recalled with their ME address and Secondary
address.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 331 / 436
436
4.12.3 Basic concepts about mediation function
Before starting the network creation , it is necessary to point out some subjects.

Each NE implementing the mediation function is considered by NECTAS and by the OS as splitted in two

parts :
– a so called ”Transport” that represents the physical equipment .This is the only part of the NE present
when there is no mediation function.
– a so called ”Mediation” that represents the equipment part performing the mediation function
The two equipment have the same physical address (i.e. NSAP address) but a different logical address
(ie. 7.1 address).
For practical reasons, it should be better to assign to the Mediation equipment the 7.1 address immediately
following the one assigned to the Transport equipment in increasing numeric order. That is because
opening the NECTAS tool and choosing the alphanumerical view, adjacent addresses are represented in
adjacent lines and so it is easier to distinguish an equipment with both its transport and mediation parts.
The non SDH Alcatel equipment (Q2 devices) eventually interfacing the NE must be declared while
creating the network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 332 / 436
436
4.12.3.1 Creation of a graphical representation
Before creating the graphical representations , close NECTAS and NETWORK CONFIGURATION
tools if opened.
Two graphical representations are to be created :
• LOCAL
• GLOBAL
4.12.3.1.1 Local Network creation for Mediation NE
The local network is the one that comprises the NE the operator is physically connected to , divided into
”transport” and ”mediation” and all the non SDH equipment interfacing the ”mediation” part.
In order to configure the local network perform the following steps :
1) with a drawing tool ( for ex. Paintbrush) create a representation of a map or open an existing
one ( for ex. a geographical map )
2) select (use scissor for selecting in Paintbrush tool) and copy (Edit > Copy menu) it
Be careful that , if using Paintbrush , the Option > Omit picture format must be disabled because
if selected it prevents the map from being exported on the Network Configuration tool.
3) save the map if changed and minimize the drawing tool
4) open the Network Configurator tool . A pop–up (see Figure 252. ) appears asking if the user
intend to use a network with several Mediation Device (ME) . It refers to the possibility of defining
a ME number and a Secondary address for the equipment to be located. Answer Yes to the
question. Select the Network > Create option (see Figure 253. on page 334). The same
pop–up appears : answer again Yes and give a name to the network ( see Figure 254. on page
334)
Figure 252. Pop–up

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 333 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 254. Network Configuration –Network name
436
Figure 253. Network Configuration – Network creation
3AL 36566 AA AA
334 / 436
5) select the Map > Paste option to place the previous copied map (see Figure 255. )
Figure 255. Network Configuration – map open
6) save the map and leave the GENERAL name as specified by default (mandatory for the first
map, see Figure 256. )
Figure 256. Network Configuration – Save map GENERAL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 335 / 436
436
7) The three steps 8 ), 9 ) and 10 ) must be performed in case of NE with active mediation function
(i.e. with Q2 NEs connected). If no mediation function is active , perform step 8 ) and then
skip to step 12 ).

8) open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it ( see Figure 257. ) for the ”transport” equipment.

Note that the secondary address and the ME address must be 0 (mandatory) while the ME
address must be the 7.1 address of the equipment. The ”title” will appear near the alarm
synthesis row of the NECTAS application. In ”Reference” insert a generic label ( e.x. ADMTX
for transport part or ADMMF for mediation part.) . Click on the create push button to complete
the operation.
If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it,
it is enough to declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME number
equal to the 7.1 equipment address.
Figure 257. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Transport

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 336 / 436
436
9) Open the Equipment > Create menu and fill it for the ”Mediation” equipment ( see Figure 258. )
. The Secondary addres must be 0 (mandatory) , while the ME address must be the 7.1
mediation equipment logical address .Click on the create push button to complete the operation.
Figure 258. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Mediation
10 ) Define the non SDH equipment interfacing the mediation part. For each Equipment to be
declared:
Open the Equipment > Create menu again and fill it. (see Figure 259. ) .The ME number
must be the one given to the ”Mediation” part while the secondary address is the 7.1
address (logical address) of the non SDH equipment ( from 1 to 254)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 259. Network Configuration –Network equipment creation –Q2 devices
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 337 / 436
436
11 ) Repeat steps 8 ) , 9 ), 10 ) for each NE to be configured . This is intended for NEs with mediation
function and Q2 NE managed. If a NE does not have the Mediation function, only step 8 ) has
to be performed.

12 ) For each equipment to be located :

move the cursor in the point where to locate the equipment , click on the left mouse key
and select the Locate Equipment option ( see Figure 260. ).
Select the localize option (Figure 261. ) A label with the NE name and NE status appears
(Figure 262. on page 339) .
To delete the label , in case of need, click on the left mouse key and perform the DELETE
option.
Figure 260. Network Configuration – Locate Equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 338 / 436
436
Figure 261. Network Configuration – Equipment Location
Figure 262. Network Configuration –Label
13 ) Close the Network Configuration tool : the network is automatically saved (see Figure 263. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 339 / 436
436
Figure 263. Network configuration – save and close
If the local NE does not perform mediation function, i.e if no Q2 equipment are connected to it, it is enough
to declare the equipment as a whole with Secondary address 0 and ME number 0.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 340 / 436
436
4.12.3.1.2 Global network creation
1) In order to create a global Network (the one that can be seen when the R–ECT is active) follows
the steps from 1 ) to 13 ) described in para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 333. Note that a new network
with a new name has to be created.

The following equipment must be located by the operator as previously described :

– the local equipment (transport , mediation) and its non SDH equipment defined in the
LOCAL network except that the transport equipment must have Secondary address 0 and
ME number equal to the 7.1 NE address instead of 0 as in the LOCAL network.
– all the equipment building the network and the related non SDH equipment connected.
For each equipment with non SDH equipment connected , the ”transport” , the ”mediation” and
all the Q2 devices are to be declared.
2) Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
NETWORK_RF = <name_of_global__network>
4.12.4 NECTAS activation
Only in case of graphical representation of the network :
– Select the NECTAS icon of the ALCATEL group and choose the File > Property option from the
Program Manager and add to the command line the name of the local network (see Figure 264. on
page 341).
Figure 264. Nectas activation on local network

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 341 / 436
436
4.12.4.1 Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network
The operator may not be interested on a graphical representation of the network with a background map
and located equipment but may be interested on giving to the NEs a title to be shown in the synthesis

line.

In order to do that open the NETWORK CONFIGURATION tool, define a network and create the
Equipment as described in points 1 ), 4 ) , 8 ), 9 ),10 ) at para. 4.12.3.1.1 on page 4.12.3.1.1333.for the
the local network.
Perform the same steps for the global network creation . The equipment to be declared are those specified
at para.4.12.3.1.2 point 1 ) .
Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
4.12.4.2 Remote craft terminal option without a graphical support and without equipment’s
label
The operator may be interested on having neither a graphical representation of the network nor name
labels for the Equipment. In this case it is enough to :
• open the Network configurator tool

• assign a name to a fictitious network
• close the Network configurator
• Add the following string in the ”PEX” Section of the ”Win.ini” file:
This is the shortest procedure to enable R–ECT function .
N.B. To make effective the operations made on para. 4.12.3.1 and on para. 4.12.4.2 it is necessary
to close the Nectas session eventually open and start again.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 342 / 436
436
4.12.5 Configuration of the Network Elements
When a network is configured for the first time, it is necessary to connect the CT to each NE of the network,
open the NECTAS tool and perform :
– a LOCAL configuration (LOCAL choice of the Local configuration application)
– a LAPD or ETHERNET configuration as specified at para. 4.5.6 on page 176.
– a MF configuration ( if the Equipment performs mediation functions)
– a R–ECT configuration ( If the Equipment acts as MASTER) .
The MF and R–ECT configurations can be performed locally or by the OS.
By means of the ”Local Configuration application” each NE of the network is configured.

The ” 7.1 address ” must be the same that has been used in the graphical representation ( if present) .
By means of LAPD (or ETHERNET ) configuration configure the connection among the NEs that will be
used for data exchange.
For each equipment acting as Mediation device, the mediation configuration (MF configuration) has to
be performed in order to activate the Mediation function. The 7.1 address must be compliant with the one
defined while building up the graphical network. Suggestion given at para. 4.12.3 on page 332 is strongly
recommended.
When the MF has been enabled, a second line appears on the NECTAS main screen if working in
alphanumeric way ( or a second label if working in graphical way) representing the Mediation part.
By clicking twice on the new line, perform a zoom session on the Mediation part and digit the login and
password.
Perform a local configuration on the MEDIATION FUNCTION menu by selecting :
– a local Q2 interface definition
– a slave NE address
The local Q2 interface configuration table is used to define the Q2 type and speed.
The slave NE table is used to define the linked Q2 elements. The slave NE number must be compliant
to the Secondary address defined while building the network and is the logical address ( 7.1) of the non
SDH device. The Q2 address is the non SDH device physical address.
Both addresses can range from 1 to 254.
Refer to para 4.5 on page 73 and para. 4.11 on page 319 for details on local configurations and on MF
application.
In the R–ECT configuration the operator has to declare all the accessible remote NE in order to collect
the synthesis information and to perform a zoom from R–ECT.
For each remote NE insert the NSAP and the ” 7.1 address ”. Move with the next button to complete
addressing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 343 / 436
436
If the remote equipment performs mediation functions, two R–ECT configuration entries has to be
compiled : one for the Transport part and one for the Mediation part. In this case the 7.1 address of the
two parts must be different and given accordingly to the values stated both in the local configuration of
the remote NE and while building up the graphical network.

The other fields are identical for both parts.

After having completed the configurations , to activate the remote function select the View > Network
menu of the Nectas application. To deactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option.
The graphical representation appears ( if present ) by default when NECTAS is activated. Use the view
menu to switch to the alpha mode. This last is the default one if the operator has not a graphical description.
Double click on the name of a remote NE (both in alpha and graphical mode) to directly open a zoom
session on the chosen equipment (either ADM or non SDH).
The alpha mode may also be used if a graphical representation of the network is present. In this case the
NEs labels appears near the alarm synthesis row . Switching between the two modes is enabled by means
of the View option.
N.B. The local ECT operator is not aware of the fact that some R–ECT operator is connected to the
NE and cannot inhibit the access from remote.
N.B. The R–ECT function does not support the software download of the remote elements.
N.B. For configuration files storage , please refer to para. 7.1.1 on page 375.
If the NEs making up the network have been configured before the R–ECT activation , in order
to see the configuration files by opening the configuration applications, the Operator can either
move them from the c:\alcatel\<equipment_name_and_rel>\directory to the
c:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name_and_rel> or perform a ”RECEIVE”
command after having activated the R–ECT.
4.12.6 Time Management
The time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel application ”International” (Figure 265. )
and ” Data Time” of Windows ( Figure 266. on page 345). Be careful that the setting format for DATE is:
• MM/DD/YY
and for TIME is
• HH:MM:SS
The Time manager distributes the time to all the NEs and to the CT eventually connected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 344 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 265. Windows – International
Figure 266. Windows – Date and Time
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
345 / 436
In OS presence , the OS acts as time manager .
In absence of OS ,the R–ECT function acts as a time manager through the MASTER element.

In case of more than one R–ECT active , the time manager will be the one connected to the Master with

lowest 7.1 address.
To have a correct time management , connect the PC to each NE and do the following :
1) In the AUTOEXEC.BAT specify the time zone in which the P.C is by inserting the line :
SET TZ=METx
where ”x” is
0 for Greenwich
from –1 to –12 for east
from +1 to +12 for west
The” –” and ”+” signs are mandatory.
The line must be inserted before the win command ( i.e. before opening windows)
2) In the WIN.INI file insert the following line in the [PEX] section :
CT_TIME=CLIENT
If the line CT_TIME=MANAGER is already present, substitute it.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 346 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
COMMISSIONING
347 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
348 / 436
1 INTRODUCTION
The commissioning procedures consist of the following steps:

• Start–up of the PC and check on the Window system.

• Installation of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software
• Start–up of the SWP Craft Terminal applicative software
The ” SWP Craft Terminal ” denomination is referred to all type of management software
(ECT / EACT / R–ECT /R–EACT).
The installation and start–up referred to download applicative are described in the GENERAL
PROCEDURES section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 349 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
350 / 436
2 START–UP OF THE PC
2.1 Scope of the procedure

The scope of this procedure is to illustrate the start–up phases of the Personal Computer and the checks
made on the Windows System.
2.2 Start–up
The PC is started up through the relative switch. At this point the operator views the DOS system’s prompt.
If dealing with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11 the operator views the DOS system’s prompt or the applicative
WINDOWS if the WIN command is included in the Windows startup–files.
If dealing with WINDOWS 95 at the PC start–up the operator views directly the applicative software.
2.3 Check on the windows system
2.3.1 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11
The operator must carry out the following operations in the given sequence in order to check that the
WINDOWS system has been installed properly.
1) Type WIN command and press ENTER key
2) The WINDOWS mask with relevant release version will appear. If it is 3.1 or greater the system
is ready to be installed.
3) Close the WINDOWS system by clicking the left mouse–button on the FILE option and by
selecting the EXIT WINDOWS option from the displayed menu.
4) If the WINDOWS system is lower than 3.1 the operator must install WINDOWS MICROSOFT
of a version equal to or greater than 3.1. following the constructors instructions.
2.3.2 Check on the Windows system by using WINDOWS 95
The WINDOWS 95 application starts automatically when switching on the PC if the software has been
correctly loaded.
N.B. It is suggested not to have installed the two applicative software WINDOWS 3.1 ( or 3.11) and
WINDOWS 95 on the same PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 351 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
352 / 436
3 INSTALLATION OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE
3.1 Purpose of the procedure

The procedure describes how to install the applicative software during initial turn–on.
The diskette also contains all the general applications utilized to execute all the checking operations (Byte
transmission, alarm synthesis) on the equipment.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Installation with WINDOWS 3.1 or 3.11
This installation set is composed of the following diskettes:
• the first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS (Rel. 3.69_5) applicative (CIT ALCATEL
copyright)
• second group of 2 diskettes (number 4 and 5) contains the ECT or R–ECT management
applicative of the equipment. For the EACT or R–EACT management applicative the relevant
SW Package is distributed on 5 diskettes (numbered 4 to 8).
• If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 or higher has already been installed in the same directory where the
operator intends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 10 ) on page 354.
To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations:
1) Insert diskette 1 into the disk unit (example A).
2) Open the File Manager.
3) Click on ”A” (example) on File Manager to access the disk unit containing the diskette.
4) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file.
5) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment
management software will be loaded.
The default directory is C : \ ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available:
• ”CONTINUE”: permits to continue the installation procedure.
• ”CANCEL”: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mouse–button on the CONTINUE key.
6) A windows is displayed where is possible select the installation’s language and the port (COM1
or COM2). Confirm the selection.
7) When the files of diskette 1 have been all copied the user is requested to insert diskette 2 and
3 as request.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
8) At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 353 / 436
436
9) If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure
will have to be repeated over again.
The NECTAS icon is automatically presented in the Alcatel group by deleting all icons that might
have been previously created in the same group.

If the deleted icon applicative are needed again, launch the application either from the DOS

ambient or create new icons through Windows.
NOTE : NECTAS overwrites the previously installed NECTAS version if any.
10 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit to install the ECT SWP (or EACT SWP)
11 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file
12 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating two different selections:
• 1651SM – To install the NE applications

• 1651MF10 – To install the Q2 Mediation Function applications, when non–SDH
equipment have to be managed
Click on ”1651SM”.
13 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment
The default directory is C : ALCATEL. The following two select keys are available:
• ”CONTINUE”: permits to continue the installation procedure.

• ”CANCEL”: permits to cancel the selection made.
Click the left mouse–button on the CONTINUE key.
ATTENTION The directory must be the same of the previously installed ”NECTAS” (diskettes 1 to 3).
14 ) When all the files of diskette 4 have been copied the user is requested to insert in sequence
diskette 5. Click OK with the left mouse–button to confirm.
With EACT–R EACT the diskettes are 4 to 6 numbered.
15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all diskettes. At the end of the operation a message
(INSTALLATION COMPLETED), together with the OK key, will appear on the window.
Position the cursor on the key and click the left mouse–button.
(If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure
will have to be repeated over again).
To complete the Remote Craft Terminal configuration will be necessary create the network as
for para. 4.12 on page 329.
16 ) It is suggested to install, the management applicative of several equipments (or more software
releases of the same equipment) on the same ”ALCATEL” directory.
When connecting the equipment proper the relevant software will be automatically selected
(after start–up execution).
17 ) When the Mediation Function is needed on the NE to manage non–SDH equipment (Q2
interface) it is necessary to repeat the installation from diskette number 4.
In this case click on 1651MF10.
Select the same directory of the previous installation and terminate the installation of the other
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
diskettes.
To complete the Mediation Function configuration will be necessary create the network as for
para. 4.12 on page 329
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 354 / 436
436
18 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. After having selected in sequential order:
Main Program Manager → Control Panel → Ports, select the required port.
The following are the parameters to set:

Bit rate 9600
Data bits 8
Parity odd
Stop bits 1
Flow Control None
19 ) The operator can work with three applications at the same time. To have more applications
proceed as follows:
• select File Manager of Main
• select WIN. INI of WINDOWS
• Scroll till [PEX]
• Under PEX type:
APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted.
20 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see ”Chapter 4. START–UP OF
THE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE ”SWP ECT 1651 SM”” on page 359).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 355 / 436
436
3.2.2 Installation with WINDOWS 95
If dealing with WINDOWS 95 just notice that the ”File Manager” is called ”Windows Explorer” and to
activate it the command to execute is :

Start > Programs > Windows Explorer
The installation set consists of five diskettes:
– The first group of 3 diskettes contains the NECTAS applicative (CIT Alcatel Copyright)
– the second group of two diskettes (numbered 4 and 5) for the SW KIT without EACT or five diskettes
(numbered 4 to 8) for the SW KIT with EACT contains the management applicative of the equipment.
– If NECTAS Rel. 3.77 or higher has already been installed in the same directory where the operator
intends to install the SWP KIT, skip to step 11 ) on page 356 .
To install the software in a correct mode, execute the following operations:
1) Insert diskette 1 into disk unit A (ex.).
2) Open the Windows Explorer tool
3) Select the driver ”A” from the Windows Explorer to access the disk unit containing the diskette.
4) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file.
5) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment
The default directory is C : ALCATEL.
6) A window is displayed where it is possible to select the installation’s language and the port
COM1, COM2 . Confirm the default selection.
7) In this way the WINDOWS system copies the files on the hard disk indicating the percentage
of files copied.
8) Insert the diskettes 2, 3 in the required order.
9) At the end of the operation an acknowledge message is given.
10 ) If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure
The NECTAS icon is generated.
11 ) Insert diskette 4 into the disk unit in order to install the ECT ( or EACT) SWP.
12 ) Click twice on ”setup.exe” file
13 ) At this point a window is displayed indicating the directory onto which the Equipment
management software will be loaded. The default directory is C : ALCATEL.
ATTENTION – The directory must be as that of the previously installed NECTAS (diskette 1,
2, 3).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
14 ) Insert the following diskettes in the required order ( 4, 5 for ECT/RECT, 4 to 8 with
EACT/REACT).
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 356 / 436
436
15 ) In this way the system copies the files of all the diskettes. At the end of the operation an
acknowledge message is given.
If the installation is not correct, the system will launch a message and the installation procedure
16 ) It is suggested to install the management applicative of several equipment (or more SW

versions of the same equipment) on the same Alcatel directory.
When connecting the equipment the relevant SW will be automatically selected (after start–up
execution).
17 ) Some parameters must be set for the selected port. To access the table to be compiled activate
the menu in the given order :
My computer > Control Panel > System > Device Manager > Ports
and then select the chosen port. It must be the same declared while installing NECTAS.
The following are the parameters to set:
Bit rate 9600
Data bits 8
Parity odd
Stop bits 1
Flow control None
18 ) The operator can work with three applications at the same time. To have more applications
proceed as follows:
• select File Manager of Main
• select WIN. INI of WINDOWS
• Scroll till [PEX]
• Under PEX type:
APPLICATIONS=number of applications wanted.
19 ) At this point the applicative software is ready to be activated (see ”Chapter 4. START–UP OF
THE APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE ”SWP ECT 1651 SM”” on page 359).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 357 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
358 / 436
4 START–UP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE

This procedure describes the start–up phases of the applicative software.
4.2 Start–up
4.2.1 Start–up with Windows 3.1 or 3.11 installed
After having started the PC the operator must proceed as follows to activate the software system:
• To connect WINDOWS, type WIN
• Click twice on Program Manager. The screen of Figure 267. will present the icons of the
”ALCATEL” group.
The NECTAS icon must be used to start the application, clicking twice on it .
• The screen with identifier and password request will appear.
The ”Network Configuration” icon is used in case of R–ECT or R–EACT management software
It permits to setup the network, addressing the NEs reachable in Remote way.
The software system can be also connected from DOS prompt, through commands:
CD ALCATEL
WIN NECTAS
These commands prevent connecting the WINDOWS system, and directly activates the application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 267. Icons to start–up from windows
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 359 / 436
436
4.2.2 Start–up with Windows 95
In order to activate the ALCATEL product , perform the following sequence :

Start > Programs > Alcatel

and activate the NECTAS icon.
It is possible to have the NECTAS icon in the start menu in order to activate it easily.
To do that perform the following sequence :
Start > Setting > Taskbar > Start Menu Programs
Click on the Add push button and select with the browser the nectas.exe file.
Choose then where to put the icon with the pop–up menu.
Refer to WINDOWS manual for details.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 360 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
OPERATION
361 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
362 / 436
1 INTRODUCTION
The operating procedures consist of the following steps:

• Network configuration for Remote Craft Terminal and Q2 Mediation Function management
• NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C software configuration
• Display state of the NE
• Modify the configuration files
• Routine procedures
The routine procedures concern:
– backing–up the configuration files, in case of files modification.
– backing–up the stored alarms or history files when the disks are nearly full.
– backing–up the stored G.784 performance monitoring files.
– backing–up the stored inventory data files.
• Software shut–down and restart
The above operations concern the management applicative with all type of Craft terminal applicative.
(ECT / EACT / R–ECT / R–EACT).
The operating mode of the download applicative is described in the GENERAL PROCEDURES section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 363 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
364 / 436
2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2
MEDIATION FUNCTION

The procedure in details described in chapter 4.12 on page 329 shows how the R–ECT operator can set
a textual or graphical representation of the network in order to reach each NE simply clicking on a relevant
label and digit a login, in a remote way.
The same chapter also present the same procedure for the Q2 Mediation Function, referred to non– SDH
equipment.
In this procedure the main settings and also simplified options are reported. These last are useful when
the operator want to manage the network not by means the graphical mode but only by a textual one.
The procedure consists of 3 alternative steps:
• Graphical representation of the network
– Local network creation
– Global network creation
• Definition of the NEs names without graphical representation of the network
• Remote CT or Mediation Function option without a graphical support and without equipment’s
label
and of a common part:
• Configuration of the network elements
2.2 Graphical representation of the Network
To create a graphical representation of the network apply the following steps:
1) draw the map using a drawing tool
The following operations are carried out by means the Network Configuration Tool of Nectas
2) paste the previous copied map
3) assign a label and a name to the NE as a local element and locate it on the map
4) assign a label and a name to all the NEs of the network and locate them on the map
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 365 / 436
436
2.3 Definition of NEs name without Graph. Repres. of the Network
When no graphical representation is needed but however the operator want to give a name to each NE
that will appear in the synthesis strip of the Alarm Synthesis screen, in the R–ECT management function

or Q2 Mediation Function this procedure is applied:.

1) activate the Network Configurator Tool and define a local network
2) give a name to the network.
3) assign a name to the Global network
4) close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on this
paragraph.
2.4 Remote craft terminal option without Graphical support and without
equipment’s label
When is needn’t neither a graphical representation of the network nor the name labels for the Equipment.
In this case it is enough to :
1) open the Network configurator tool
2) assign a name to a fictitious network
3) Then close the Nectas section and open it again to make effective the operations made on this
paragraph.
2.5 Configuration of the Network elements
1) Configure each NE of the network by means of the ”Local Configuration application” .
– configure the connection by means of the ”local configuration” table.
– In the R–ECT configuration declare all the remote NE You can access in order to collect
the synthesis information and to perform a zoom from R–ECT.
– apply the R–ECT configuration if You like to configure the NE You are connected with, as
MASTER.
2) activate the remote function selecting the View > Network menu of the Nectas application.
To disactivate use the View > Subnetwork Equipment option.
NOTE TIME MANAGEMENT
Time setting for the CTs is carried out by the Control Panel applications ”International and Data Time ”of
Windows .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Time manager (that can be the OS or in absence of it the Master NE), distributes the time to all the
NEs and to the CT eventually connected. (See para 4.12.6. on page 344 )
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 366 / 436
436
3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

This procedure describes how to software configure the equipment.
The configuration procedure consists of 4 main branches:
• Equipment configuration: to configure the units inside the NE
• Connection configuration: utilized to configure STM signal mapping
• Local configuration: to configure the addresses utilized to manage the NE’s through the TMN
supervisory network
• Routing Table: to manage the Routing Tables of the NE’s (TMN).
3.2 Configuration
To configure proceed as follows:
1) Select the APPLICATION–CHOICE option and click the left mouse–button.
2) The application select window will appear. Select the desired Configuration and click the left
mouse–button.
Click OK to confirm.
After the upload of the configuration of the NE, the window of the selected application will be
opened (see ”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 73).
3) To utilize this application, the operator must be authorized through the operator’s profile
assigned with the administrative application.
Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AE
label green indication in the Alarm Synthesis).
4) If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the left
mouse–button. An options menu will appear (see subpara. Options File under para.
”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 73).
5) Select the OPEN option and click the left mouse–button. The list of all the configuration files will
appear.
6) Select the file required and click the left mouse–button.

At this point the operator obtains the desired configuration, and has the possibility of modifying
and utilizing it as a new configuration.
7) Click the option TABLES (with the left mouse–button).

A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window.
No configuration file will be present after the applications have been executed the first time.
Therefore, if the operator selects the ”Open...” option from the ”File” menu no file will appear.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
To create a configuration file the operator must directly select the ”Tables” option, hence he
will be able to access all the configuration tables.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 367 / 436
436
8) Select the desired table and click the left mouse–button.
Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened.
The operator can proceed in different ways:

• configure in the order specified in the listed tables starting from Equipment Configuration.
The given order follows a correct operative function.
• Configure as required.
A detailed description of the tables and various commands are stated in:
”Equipment Configuration Application” on page 83.
”Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application” on page 119.
”Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit)” on page 163.
” Drop Shelf Connection Configuration Application”on page 169
”Local Configuration Application” on page 176.
”Routing Table Configuration Application” on page 186.
9) Execute the desired configurations and click OK to confirm.
10 ) To execute other configurations repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the option
FILE and click the left mouse–button.
11 ) Select the option ”SAVE AS”. At this point the configurations can be saved in a new file (by
inserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration.
Configurations can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option ”SAVE”).
Click the OK key to confirm.
12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file.
It is also possible to title the created file with a short description.
To this purpose set the pointer in the title row and click the left mouse–button. Type the title.
It is also possible insert the operator name.
13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the configuration has been stored. To send it to the Network
Element, select the option FILE.
14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow which
contains the list of all the configurations.
15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sent
to the NE which assumes it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 368 / 436
436
4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS

This procedure describes how to display the status of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C.
The applications utilized are:
• Alarm Status & Control: permits to show the alarms conditions and the actual status of the NE.
• G.784 Performance Monitoring: permits to check the quality of tributary and aggregate links.
4.2 Display alarm status & control
The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the NECTAS system (see the
Commissioning Procedures),
To display the status of the NE, inherent to the A.S. & C. application, the operator must proceed as follows:
1) Select the option CHOICE–APPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Alarm Status &
Remote Controls and then click the left mouse–button.
Then click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the AS&C application
appears.
This window shows:
• the physical structure of the NE with the equipped units;
• the logical display of the equipped units.
The screen represent the alarm condition according the Configuration tables downloaded on
the NE.
4) A first synthesis of the alarms can be obtained through the slots equipped on each unit of the
NE (see para 4.6 ”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” on page 189 ).
5) If a unit is alarmed, the operator can enter other subwindows to have further information on the
type of alarm.
To this purpose, select the unit to display through the mouse pointer; when the pointer becomes
a magnifier glyph, click the left mouse–button. The required information is displayed.
6) With regard to some unit and functions, another screen permits to display more detailed
information. To this purpose the operator must select the box involved with the pointer and click
the left mouse–button when the magnifier glyph appears.
7) The selection of the NE units to display can be also operated through option VIEW in the AS&C
window. This option is described in detail at para. ”Options of the AS&C application” on page
249.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 369 / 436
436
4.3 Display G.784 performance monitoring
The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the Commissioning
Procedures).

To display the status of the NE inherent to the G.784 P.M. application, the operator must proceed as
follows:
1) Select the option CHOICE–APPLICATION with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Performance
Monitoring and then click the left mouse–button.
Afterwards, click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the G.784 P.M.
application appears.
Select the points to be monitored and how to proceed.
ATTENTION : the point to be monitored for AU4 B3/PJC in the Aggregate, must be
selected in the relevant table in Equipment Configuration.
The results of the P.M. tests made at the test points configured during the Configuration Phases
will be displayed through this window.
4) A detailed description of the G.784 P.M. application is given in para. 4.8 ”G.784 Performance
Monitoring Application” on page 276.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 370 / 436
436
5 LOG ACCESS

This procedure describes how to access logs.
The Alarm Synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioning
procedures).
Logs can be accessed either:
• through the History option, directly with the Alarm Synthesis window, or in the AS & C application
or
• with the Maintenance Memory Application
5.2 History
This paragraph is referred to the alarms stored in the Craft Terminal (about 3000 events)
To access the stored alarms either directly from the Alarm Synthesis Window or after having entered the
AS&C application window, the operator must proceed as follows:
1) Select the HISTORY option and click the left mouse–button.

This option has two other options which permit to either display or print the alarm messages.
2) After having selected one of the two options (by clicking the left mouse–button), a subwindow
with a menu appears and the operator can select the messages to display (see para. ”ALARM
SYNTHESIS WINDOW” on page 54 and ”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” on
page 189). In the latter case, further detailed information is obtained.
3) After having selected the option with the left mouse–button, click the OK key with the same
button.
4) If the selected option is ”DISPLAY”, the messages will appear in a scrolling subwindow
containing the last messages of that type.
If the selected option is ”PRINT”, all the messages of that type will be printed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 371 / 436
436
5.3 Maintenance memory
The Maintenance Memory function allows to obtain information on the appearance/clearing of events
occurring in the NE. The NE stores the events in a Maintenance Memory. The number of stored event

depends on the type of event.

The Maintenance Memory is structured as a set of blocks. Each block is associated to an entity defined
in the NE. Each entity is in turn associated to a set of events that will be stored in the entity block.
The entity can be grouped in the GROUP ENTITY. The Group Entity and associated entity are defined in
the N.E..
The events can be read from the N.E. only following operator request.
To access the Maintenance Memory proceed as follows:
1) Select the option APPLICATION–CHOICE with the pointer and then click the left mouse–button.
2) The window for the application selection will appear; select the indication Maintenance Memory
and then click the left mouse–button.
Then click the OK key with the left mouse–button.
3) The window for the application selection will be closed and the window for the maintenance
memory application appears.
A detailed description of this window and relevant options is given in para. ”MAINTENANCE
MEMORY APPLICATION” on page 257.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 372 / 436
436
6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION

This procedure describes how to modify the configuration files.
6.2 How to modify files
The alarm synthesis window appears after having initialized the software system (see the commissioning
procedures),
To modify the configuration files proceed as follows:
1) Select the APPLICATION CHOICE option and click the left mouse–button.
2) The window to select the application will appear. Select the Configuration to modify, i.e.:
• Connection Configuration with Full Matrix or
• Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix or
• Drop Shelf connection Configuration or
• Equipment Configuration, or
• Local Configuration, or
• Routing Table
now click the left mouse–button.

The window of the selected Configuration application will be opened (see relevant para. i.e.:
”Equipment Configuration Application” on page 83.
”Connection Configuration with Full Matrix Application” on page 119.
”Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix (Connection Card Unit)” on page 163.
”Drop Shelf Connection Configuration” on page 169
”Local Configuration Application” on page 176.
”Routing Table Configuration Application” on page 186.
3) To utilize the application, the operator must be authorized through the Operator’s profile
assigned with the ADMINISTRATIVE application.
Furthermore, the access with Craft Terminal must be enabled by the Operation System (AE
label green indication in the Alarm Synthesis).
4) If the operator is authorized, he must select the FILE Option and then click the left
mouse–button. An options menu will appear (see subpara. OPTIONS FILE under para.
”CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS” on page 73)
5) Select the OPEN option and click the left mouse–button. The list of all the configuration files
will appear.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6) Select the file to modify and click the left mouse–button.

Click OK to confirm
At this point the operator obtains the desired configuration.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 373 / 436
436
7) Click the option TABLES (through the left mouse–button).
A list of all the tables configured for the selected file will appear in a scrolling window.
8) Select the desired table and click the left mouse–button.

Click OK to confirm. A window relative to the selected table will be opened.

9) Execute the desired modifications and click OK to confirm (for the table description see relevant
paragraphs.)
10 ) To execute other modifications repeat the procedure from point 7, if otherwise select the option
FILE and click the left mouse–button.
11 ) Select the option ”SAVE AS.”. At this point the modifications can be saved in a new file (by
inserting a new name in the window which appears), by keeping the old configuration.
Modifications can also be saved in a new file named as the source file (with option ”Save”).
Click the OK key to confirm.
12 ) The operator must select the disk utilized to store the file.
It is also possible to title the created file with a short description. To this purpose set the pointer
in the title row and click the left mouse–button.
Write the title.
It is also possible to insert the operator name.
13 ) Click OK to confirm. At this point the new configuration has been stored. To send it to the
Network Element, select the option FILE.
14 ) Select the option SEND in the menu which appears. This option opens a subwindow which
contains the list of all the configurations.
15 ) Select the new configuration file and confirm with key OK. At this point the configuration is sent
to the NE which assumes it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 374 / 436
436
7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES
7.1 Introduction
The operating routine procedures consist of:
• the configuration files back–up

• the stored alarms/events Maintenance Memory files back–up.
• the G.784 Performance Monitoring file back–up
• the Remote Inventory file back–up
7.1.1 How to back–up files
In order to backup files , the operator have to distinguish between different situations :
a) The Remote Craft Terminal is deactivated ( active selection ”View –> Subnetwork” on the Nectas
Main screen menu ) but a local network is present (i.e. Nectas has been activated with the name of
the local network as parameter).
The configuration files are located in the directory :
c:\network\<local_network_name>\<equipment_name>
The directories are automatically generated when creating the local network.
b) The Operator is dealing with a global network i.e. the Remote Craft terminal is activated (selection
”View –> Network” on the Nectas Main screen menu active)
The configuration files are located in the directory :
c:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name>
The directories are automatically generated when creating the global network.
c) No Remote Craft Terminal is active
The default directory for the configuration files is :
c:\alcatel\<equipment_name>
The root directory must be the one declared installing the SWP ( ALCATEL is the default that can
be changed) . The child directory must be the Equipment’s name and release and is automatically
generated.
To back–up the configuration files the operator must proceed as follows:
1) Select the configuration directory containing the files to back–up.
2) Insert the disk into the floppy unit.
3) Create on the ”a” disk the same path You have in ”c” . Example:
a:\network\<global_network_name>\<equipment_name>
4) Copy the files from the ”c” configuration directory to the directory created in ”a” by entering the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
command:
COPY filename.(file extension) a: \<path>\filename.(file.extension)
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 375 / 436
436
This command must be repeated for all the files to back–up.
If the operator is dealing with WINDOWS 95 there is an automatic backup procedure that can be activated
by the following commands :

Start > Programs > System Tools > Backup
Refer to WINDOWS 95 manual for details.
7.2 Configuration files back–up
Following are listed the extension of the configuration files concerning the Equipment Configuration,
Connection Configuration with Full Matrix, VC4 Matrix, Local Configuration and Routing Table
Configuration Applications.
• B60 – Equipment Configuration
• B56 – Connection Configuration with Full Matrix
• B59 – Connection Configuration with VC4 Matrix
• B58 – Drop Shelf Connection Configuration
• B55 – Local Configuration
• B57 – Routing Table Configuration
Refer to para 7.1.1 on page 375 for operative details.
7.3 Stored alarms and events file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Maintenance Memory have extension .EVT.
7.4 G.784 Performance monitoring file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Performance Monitoring Application have
extension .CNT
7.5 Remote Inventory file back–up
The back–up files for alarms and events stored in the Remote Inventory Application have extension .RUR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 376 / 436
436
8 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND RESTART

This procedure describes the Shut–down and restart operations of the software system.
8.2 Shut–down of the system
To shut–down the software system the operator must execute the following operations in the given order:
1) Close all the previously opened application windows using the CLOSE option. The close option
can be selected from the Windows menu present in each window .
2) Select Application choice and, in sequence:
• Administrative
• Operator
• Logout
Confirm with the OK key

In this way another operator must insert his own pass–word to enter the software applications.
3) In this way the operator is come back in the Windows ambient.
8.3 Restart
For the restart operation refer to chapter ”Chapter 4. START–UP OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL”
APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE on page 359.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 377 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
378 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
MAINTENANCE
379 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
380 / 436
1 INTRODUCTION
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps:

• Maintenance of the PC (see Chapt. 2 on page 381)

• Shut–down and restart of the PC (see Chapt.3 on page 382)
• Corrective Maintenance (Trouble Shooting) see Chapt. 4 on page 383
• Unit Replacement with spare see Chapt. 5 on page 409.
The ” SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” denomination is referred to all types of software management
(ECT/EACT/RECT/REACT).
2 PC MAINTENANCE
With regard to PC maintenance, refer to the constructor’s documentation.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 381 / 436
436
3 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND PC RESTART

This procedure describes the Shut–down and restart the PC should the operator not be able to utilize the
SWP CRAFT TERMINAL applicative system.
3.2 Shut–down
3.2.1 Shut Down with WINDOWS 3.1 (or 3.11)
If the operator can neither utilize the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL applicative system nor identify the cause
of the trouble, he must attempt to shut-down and then restart the PC.
1) First of all, he must attempt to shut–down the software system (see ”SOFTWARE
SHUT–DOWN AND RESTART” on page 382).
2) Regardless of whether the system is shut–down or not, he must try to shut–down the WINDOW
system by selecting the Windows Menu from the Windows Program Manager window.
This menu will display a list of the options.
Select the option CLOSE by clicking the left mouse–button once. A subwindow displays the
following message ”THIS WILL CLOSE THE SESSION” and two keys: OK and ANNUL.
Click on the OK key displayed in the subwindow. This operation disconnects the operator from
the Windows ambient.
3) At this point switch the P.C. off. If the operation is unsuccessful, i.e., neither the applicative
system nor the WINDOWS system have been shut–down, switch the P.C. off anyway.
3.2.2 Shut Down with WINDOWS 95
In order to shut down the PC execute the command :
Start > Shut down
A windows s displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it or restart in MS–DOS mode.
3.3 Restart
For the restart operation refer to chapter ”START–UP OF THE PC” on page 351.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 382 / 436
436
4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING)
Troubleshooting involves the detection location and correction of failures in the equipment and replacing
the parts that are defective.
The troubleshooting procedure is carried out through flow–charts. The latter do not deal with the following
aspects:
• faulty electronic alarm indication processing and detection circuits

• faulty wiring
The Maintenance technician can be:
• (1) at a station supervisory center

• (2) on site
• (3) at a TMN network management center
In the first condition the maintenance technician refers to the remote alarms received from the equipment
i.e. :
• INT , URG , NURG , IND : remote alarms relative to the type of (internal , urgent , not urgent,
indicative)
• TORC, TANC : remote alarms relative to the malfunction of on or two / all power supply units.
• TOR , TAND : remote alarms relative to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply
DC voltages.
• TUP : remote alarm relative to the malfunction of the Equipment Controller unit.
• Outgoing parallel contact CP0 : remote alarms configured by the customer (not operative in this
release).
Besides detecting the equipment in alarm, it is also possible to detect the type of failure and the relative
source.
In the second condition, the alarmed equipment is checked immediately.
In the third condition the maintenance technician must refer to the alarms sent towards the TMN’s
Operation System.
After having detected the equipment in alarm, the condition is ”attended” through push–button
on the Equipment Controller unit or through SW command sent by the Craft Terminal or by the
Operation System.
This condition causes:
• On the racks
– The yellow LED to light up

– RED LED to light off
• On the Equipment Controller front cover:
– Yellow LED (ATTD) to light up

– RED LED NURG or URG to light off ( available for other alarms).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
If both LEDs are on, a first ”Attended ” command attends the NURG and an eventual
second ”Attended” command attends the URG.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 383 / 436
436
First and second conditions, LOCAL Maintenance:
It is essential to observe the condition of the other LEDs on the unit front coverplates, and use the Craft
Terminal (PC).

The Equipment Controller unit is provided with LEDs which indicate :
Red LED URG detection of an urgent alarm
Red LED NURG detection of a not urgent alarm
Yellow LED ABN detection of an ”ABNORMAL” operative condition.
Type: active loopbacks, forging the units into service,
force ON or OFF , try to restore after ALS.
Yellow LED IND detection of an indication alarm.
Yellow LED ATTD indicates storing through push–button URG , NURG.
Green LED only for indicates INSERVICE Unit for 1+1 Protection ( not used in this
SMEC release ).
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the type of alarm (URG – NURG – IND) and relevant
condition (ABN = abnormal condition , ATTD = storing).
Both the Equipment Controller unit and the other units (except Power Supply unit) are provided with a red
LED indicating unit local failure.
The aggregate units and the 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary units are provided with green LED which glows
when the unit is working. This LED is OFF for Spare only (Not for 1+N spare tributary).
The trouble–shooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flow–charts and
according to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.1 on page 388.:
• Figure 268. on page 386 General flow–chart

• Figure 269. on page 387 Power supply alarm
And according to the Maintenance table to the Par. 4.1 on page 388.
As indicated in the flow–chart the trouble–shooting operation is facilitated by the Craft Terminal (PC) , and
by the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the Equipment Controller.
The PC is cord–connected to the relative connector on the Equipment Controller’s front coverplate.
The PC using the Alarm Status and Control applications provides in a very short time, detailed information
on the state of the alarms thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal as indicated in
Maintenance tables of Par. 4.1 on page 388. (Meaning of the Alarms)
The Maintenance Memory application allows to browse through the various classified alarms and
commands previously stored the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 384 / 436
436
N.B. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact
configuration of the equipment (Configuration applications trough P.C.)
The presence of one spare unit enables the equipment to operate correctly even following
urgent alarms (now defined ”not urgent”).
In this case the troubleshooting can be esecuted with low traffic condition.
The aim of the flow–charts which follow and maintenance tables is either to locate the faulty unit and to
replace it with a spare as well as to locate an eventual failure along the link.
The flow–chart/tables are based mainly on the probability of a failure, i.e. the aim of the flow–chart is to
identify the unit or the link most likely to have failed.
The flow–charts/tables should be followed even in the case that the cited LEDs flash, because this flashing
condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems.
3rd condition: Center Operation System in the TMN:
All the equipment connected to the TMN are controlled by the Operation System.
Detailed alarm data obtained (as locally through the PC) tracing the cause of alarm and deciding on the
type of maintenance operations the carry out.
Refer to the Operation System handbooks for more detailed information.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 385 / 436
436
START

AN ALARM
IS PRESENT
STORE THE ALARM THROUGH PUSH–BUTTON

ON THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ESCT
IS
YES THE POWER SUPPLY NO PROCEED ACCORDING TO ”POWER SUPPLY ALARM” FLOW CHART
UNIT GREEN LED IN THIS PARAGRAPH
ON?
IS IS
THE EQUIPMENT NO THE NO
CONTROLLER RED RED LED URG
LED ON? ON ?
YES YES
THROUGH PUSH–BUTTON R IS
NO ONE OF THE
RESET THE UNIT
RED LEDS INDICATING UNIT
ALARM ON?
DOES YES
THE ALARM NO TRANSITORY
CONDITION FAILURE REPLACE THE UNIT IN ALARM.
PERSIST ? BY CONNECTING THE PC AND
INDICATING THE TYPE OF ALARM,
THE FAULTY UNIT CAN BE
YES REPLACED (OR NOT) IN CASE
OF LOW TRAFFIC.
THE UNIT IS FAULTY. REPLACE IT ACCORDING

TO THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN PARA 5 CONNECT THE PC TO THE
EQUIPMENT AND, ACCORDING TO
”UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPSARE” THE TYPE OF DETECTED ALARM, END
PROCEED AS STATED IN THE PARA 4.1
”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
END
IS
NO THE NURG RED
LED
ON?
ALARM REMOTE YELLOW LED YES

(IND) THE MAINTENANCE
OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT,
ON THE EQUIPMENT CONNECTED AFTER HAVING DETECTED THE TYPE
TO THE LOCAL ONE. CONNECT OF FAILURE, ESTABLISH IF
THE PC AND ACCORDING TO INTERVENTION MUST BE IMMEDIATE OR
THE TYPE OF ALARM PROCEED NOT AS STATED IN THE RELATIVE PARA 4.1
AS INDICATED IN THE PARA 4.1 ”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
”MEANING OF THE ALARMS”
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 268. General flow chart
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 386 / 436
436
POWER SUPPLY
FAILURE
GREEN LED
START
OFF
IS
REMOTE ALARM NO SWITCH THE POWER SUPPLY
AND PRESENT ? UNIT FIRST OFF AND THEN ON
(N.B.)
DOES
STATION POWER
THE ALARM STOP AND YES
SUPPLY FAILURE
GREEN LED LIGHTS
UP ?
END NO
REPLACE THE
POWER SUPPLY UNIT TRANSITORY FAILURE
IS
YES
REGULAR OPERATION END
RESTORED ?
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVE

BEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE
ASSEMBLY UNITS
REMOVE ALL THE UNITS FROM THE

SUBRACK INSERT THEM BACK ONE
AT A TIME UNIT WHEN THE ONE
CAUSING THE FAILURE HAS BEEN
DETECTED HENCE REPLACE IT.
END
N.B.
IF NO REMOTE ALARMS ARE USED PROCEED TO CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY
IF ABSENT, GREEN LED OF ALL THE POWER SUPPLY UNITS WILL BE OF

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 269. Power supply alarm
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 387 / 436
436
4.1 Meaning of the Alarms – Identified by means Craft Terminal
The alarm information of the NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C can be identified on the craft terminal through the
Alarm Status & Control Application (AS&C).

The alarms are viewed via the NE status or stored on alarm history files.
To access the relevant procedures, follow the indications given in ”Chapter 3. DISPLAY OF THE
NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS” on page 369, and ”Chapter. 5 LOG ACCESS” on page 371.
”ALARM, STATUS & CONTROL APPLICATION” on page 189 illustrates all the screens inherent to the
various alarm states.
Furthermore, data concerning stored alarms is specified and detailed in para. ”MAINTENANCE MEMORY
APPLICATION” on page 257.
General information on the status and alarms of the NE are present on the ”Alarm Synthesis” and in the
”general alarms and status top labels” of the AS &C application.
The relevant description and subsequent action are indicated in three tables, fromTable 29. on page 390
up to Table 31. on page 392
Some indication are common to the two tables.
Upon locating the alarms proceed as stated in Table 32. on page 394 thru’ Table 43. on page 403 to
obtain all the relevant data, including the maintenance operations to carry out.
Table 44. on page 403 thru’ Table 52. on page 407 indicate the Consequent alarms Actions for each unit.
ATTENTION: When the units are in the protected configuration, the relevant urgent alarms are declared
NOT URGENT.
When the Equipment Controller unit is in CARD FAIL condition (red LED indicating unit local
failure) never re–insert the extracted unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 388 / 436
436
PRELIMINARY CONCEPTS and DEFINITION
The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the
aid of the previously indicated tables.
The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission
network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level):
• Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical
level (Transmission media proper) and Transmission section level. The sections can be either
regenerator or multiplexer utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the
SDH frame. The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level
(example: Line LOS, LOF, B2 etc).
• Path level It concerns the transfer of data between the access points and the path. It does not
depend on the service nor on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit level’s
support. The path can either be lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity
of transferring data. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specific
functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed in the cited
tables, where path level troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example TU AIS, TU
LOP).
• Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the
circuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH
function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH order–wire channel associated
functions are required.
An example of this level alarm is tributary LOS.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 270. hereunder.
G.703
STM–N
G.703 SDH STM–N
MUX SDH MUX TRIBUTARIES
STM–N
TRIBUTARIES SDH MUX REGENERATOR
RSOH RSOH
REGENERATOR REGENERATOR
SECTION SECTION
MSOH MSOH
MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER
SECTION SECTION
POH PATH
Figure 270. Transmission network level structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 389 / 436
436
Table 29. Alarm Synthesis indication (Global Synthesis – Network Stations)
LABEL ALARM/STATUS

MAINTENANCE

ACRONYM DESCRIPTION
EF Equipment Failure–No answer from NE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. reset the
If not OK, substitute the Equipment
DF Dialogue Failure–Wrong answer from NE
Controller
AS Alarm Stop
When URG and NURG alarms are stored,

AT Alarm Receiving Attention press button on Equipment Controller or
use a CT command to activate AT
UG Urgent alarm See unit detailed indication in the

NG Not urgent alarm following tables
HA Housekeeping Alarms Check the relevant station alarm

associated to the housekeeping indication
SA Service affecting Not operative
DA Distant alarm See unit detailed indication in the

following tables
SF Signal Failure Not operative
ST Status Indicator See unit detailed indication in the

following tables
Used on the OS to acknowledge the local

TC Craft Terminal connected to the NE
CT connection
Local CT is disabled by the OS, the

AE Access enable operator cannot ”write”. If enabling is
requested, ask the OS
Send the absent configuration files to the

DC Default configuration
NE
Send the configuration files that have

LC Loss of configuration been lost to the NE. If the alarm persist,
replace the Equipment Controller.
BU Three Remote F Terminals connected

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 390 / 436
436
Table 30. Alarm Synthesis indication (Local NE)
LABEL ALARM/STATUS
MAINTENANCE
ACRONYM DESCRIPTION
EF Equipment Failure–No answer from NE Reset Craft Terminal. If not OK. reset
If not OK, substitute the Equipment
DF Dialogue Failure–Wrong answer from NE
Controller
When URG and NURG alarms are stored,

AT Alarm Receiving Attention press button on Equipment Controller or
CT command to activate AT
UG Urgent alarm See unit detailed indication in the

NG Not urgent alarm following tables
Check the relevant station alarm

HI Housekeeping indication
associated to the housekeeping indication
See unit detailed indication in the

IN Indicative alarm
following tables
See unit detailed indication in the

AC Abnormal Condition
following tables
Local CT is disabled by the OS, the

AE Access Enable operator cannot ”write”. If enabling is
requested, ask the OS
Used on the OS to acknowledge the local

TC Craft Terminal connected to the NE
CT connection
Send the absent configuration files to the

DC Default configuration
NE
Send the configuration files that have

LC Loss of configuration been lost to the NE. If the alarm persist,
replace Equipment Controller.
BU Three Remote F Terminals connected

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 391 / 436
436
Table 31. Alarm status and remote control general indication
LABEL ALARM/STATUS

MAINTENANCE

ACRONYM DESCRIPTION
AT Alarm receiving attention ––––––
UG Urgent Alarm
NG Not Urgent Alarm

See unit detailed information in the following
tables
IN Indicative Alarm
AC Abnormal Condition
If local CT is disabled by the OS, the operator

Access enable cannot ”write”. If enabling is requested, ask to
the OS
Check the relevant station alarm associated to

HI Housekeeping indication
the housekeeping indication
Performance Monitoring indication when

threshold (fixed in the equipment configuration)
UT Unavailable Time
have been overtaken. To reset use the Remote
Control in AS&C application.
LINE SHELF – Battery : Fuse–bro- Check the Station power supply.

LF ken alarm. OR alarm due to station
power supply failure.
LINE SHELF – Battery control Check the Service Battery and ANDOR
LB
Failure / Missing subunit
Check Local configuration and Routing Table

configuration. Check the link with OS. Check
OS Operation System Isolation
the correct operating of OS.
Reset and eventually substitute ESCT.
Reset the Equipment Controller. If the alarm

ES Equipment Controller failure
persists, replace the Equipment Controller unit.
Check power supply unit and, if affected by a

Power Supply alarms (1,2,3) failure, replace it.
DROP SHELF Check the Station power supply

DF
Battery Fuse–broken alarm
DROP SHELF Check the Service Battery and ANDOR

Battery control Failure / Missing – subunit
DB
(Service Batt. missing/ AND OR
failure or missing)
Check power supply unit and, if affected by a

Power Supply alarms (1,2) failure, replace it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 392 / 436
436
4.1.1 Alarms / status common to the units
The following alarms are common to all units
•
Card mismatch unit inserted into a slot equipped with another type of unit
• Software mismatch unit with no up–dated software version

• Card missing slot equipped but card missing
• Card fail internal failure (hardware) see each single unit
The statuses common to all units are:
• Card not responding no dialogue between card and Equipment Controller
• Active/Stand–by unit active (operating) or stand–by.

Not applicable for AUX/EOW unit.
N.B.
• Card not responding” is dealt as status and not as an alarm because it indicates a
temporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a unit
hardware failure. This will activate the Card Fail alarm.
The following operating status are common to some units only:
• Protection switch event Indication of switched TU (PPS), (21x2Mb/s Trib., 3x34 ,

3x45 Mb/s Trib., 140/STM1 switch Trib., S–1.1 Trib.)
• Port selected for reference clock selected tributary to send clock to CRU (21x2Mb/s Trib.)
• Commanded switch Indication of switch activated in Remote Control operation

(typical for test).
In this release active only for:
Full Matrix
CRU
Aggregate
Electrical tributaries
• Protected Card (FOR SPARE ONLY) Indication of unit protected in N+1 Trib. protec
tion.
• Low Priority Traffic (FOR SPARE ONLY) For 1:1 switch. Not operative in this release.
• (MS–RS) LAPD fail Dialogue interrupted with Equipment Controller
referred to DCC management (Aggregate and
STM1 trib.)
The following Automatic Laser Shutdown status is given for optical units (Trib. and Aggregates):
• Shutdown
• Forced to ON and OFF
• Not implemented
• Abnormal Condition
The ON or OFF condition of ALS and the attempts to restore after ALS activate the ABN indication. The
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
latter also indicates loopback commands or unit inserted into a slot whose configuration does not
correspond to the equipped one.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 393 / 436
436
Table 32. Alarms of the STM4/STM16 Aggregates
Optical Indication

Alarm
Alarm Description Unit Equipment Controller Maintenance
Acronym
Int Urg Nurg Ind Abn
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line
Multiplexer Section Alarm Check Remote

MS–AIS yes
Indication Signal Equipment
Multiplexer Section
Check Remote
Far–End MS–FERF yes
Equipment
Receive Failure
Multiplexer Section
MS–SIG–
Signal yes Check line when possible
DEG
Degrade on byte B2
Multiplexer Section
Excessive MS–EXBER yes Check line
Bit Error Rate on byte B2
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line
AU4 Alarm Indication Check Remote

AU4–AIS yes
Signal Equipment
Replace unit when

Laser Degrade LD yes
possible
Laser Fail LF yes yes Replace unit
Automatic Laser
Laser Abnormal
yes Shutdown
Condition
in progress
Laser Temperature Replace unit when

TEMP. yes yes
Excess possible
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace unit
Unit inserted into

Card
slot equipped yes yes Insert right unit
mismatch
with other type of unit
Software mismatch SW MIS yes yes Update SW version
Card
Card Missing yes
Missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Check Jumper kit or

Pass–Through fail yes
Replace the Unit.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 394 / 436
436
Table 33. Alarms of the STM1 Electrical Tributary (140/STM1 Switch. Unit)
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line (*)
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line (*)

MS–AIS yes
Indication Signal Equipment (*)
Multiplexer Section
Check Remote
Equipment (*)
Receive Failure
Multiplexer Section
MS–SIG– Check line when possible
Signal yes
DEG (*)
Degrade on byte B2
Multiplexer Section
Excessive MS–EXBER yes Check line (*)
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line (*)

AU4–AIS yes
Signal Equipment (*)
Unvailable AU Path Indi-

cates AIS signal received yes Check All AU Path
on the AU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate EX– Check line on VC4 Path

yes
(POH–VC4) BER–(B3) (*)
Replace Matrix or STM1

Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes
Trib. units.
Unit inserted into

Card
mismatch
* – Tributary side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 395 / 436
436
Table 34. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary
Optical Indication

Alarm
Acronym
Loss Signal LOS yes Check line (*)
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line (*)
MS–AIS yes
Indication Signal Equipment (*)
Multiplexer Section
Check Remote
Equipment (*)
Receive Failure
Multiplexer Section Sig-
MS–SIG– Check line when possible
nal yes
DEG (*)
Degrade on byte B2
Multiplexer Section
Excessive MS–EXBER yes Check line (*)
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LOP yes Check line (*)
AU4–AIS yes
Signal Equipment (*)
on the AU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate EX– Check line on VC4 Path
yes
(POH–VC4) BER–(B3) (*)
Replace Matrix or STM1
Loss of Pointer AU4B–LOP yes
Trib. units.
Replace unit when
Laser Degrade LD yes
possible
Laser Fail LF yes yes Replace unit
Laser Abnormal Condi- Automatic Laser
yes
tion Shutdown in progress
Unit inserted into
Card
mismatch
* – Tributary side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 396 / 436
436
Table 35. Alarms of the 140 Mbit/s Trib. (140/STM1 Switch. unit)
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Loss signal LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
Line Alarm Indication Check Remote

LAIS yes
Signal Equipment Trib. side
Replace Matrix
AU4 Loss of Pointer AU4–LPO yes
or 140Mbit/s Trib. side

on the UU Path
Excessive Bit Error Rate EX– Check line on VC4 path

yes
(POH–VC4) BER(B3) Aggregate side.
Check remote equipment

Far–End Receive Failure
FERF (G1) yes on Path which terminate
(POH–VC4)
VC4, Aggregate side
Signal Label mismatch C2Mism yes Configuration error
Unit inserted into

Card
mismatch

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 397 / 436
436
Table 36. Alarms of the 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s Tributary
Optical Indication

Alarm
Acronym
Loss of 34/45 Mbit/s sig-

LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
nal
Unvailable TU Path Indi-

cates AIS signal received yes Check all TU Path
on the TU Path
Alarm Indication Signal Check other equipment

TU–AIS yes
on TU3 on Path, Agg. side
VC3 Far–End Receive Check other equipment

FERF yes
Failure on Path, Agg. side
VC3 Signal Label

SgLbMIS yes Configuration error
mismatch
Unit inserted into

Card
mismatch

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 398 / 436
436
Table 37. Alarms of the 21 x 2 Mbit/s Tributary
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Loss of 2 Mbit/s signal LOS yes Check line, Tributary side
Loss of frame LOF yes Check line, Tributary side
Alarm Indication Signal Check other equipment

TU–AIS yes
on TU12 on Path, Agg. side

on the UU Path
VC12 Far–End Receive Check remote equipment

FERF yes
Failure on Path, Agg. side.
VC12 Signal Label

mismatch
Unit inserted into slot

Card
equipped yes yes Insert right unit
mismatch

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 399 / 436
436
Table 38. 3/2 TransMux & 5 x 2Mbit/s Trib. Unit alarms
Optical Indication

Alarm
Acronym
Loss of 2 Mbit/s Frame

LOF yes
(Note)
Check Line Tributary side
Loss of Multiframe on
LOF yes
CRC4 (Note)
Loss of incoming Trib.

LOSS yes Check line Trib. side
signal
Check Lower hierarchical

AIS received on Tx Trib. AIS Tx yes
level equipment.

cates AIS signal received yes Check all the TU path
on the AU Path
VC12 Far–End receive Check Far–End

VC12 FER yes
failure equipment on path
VC12 Signal label

mismatch
Loss of 8 Mbit/s frame

LOF yes
received
Check Far–End PDH
AIS 8 Mbit/s AIS yes equipment 8Mbit/s level
FERF 8 Mbit/s FERF yes
Loss of 34 Mbit/s incom-

LOSS yes
ing Trib.
Loss 34 Mbit/s Frame LOF yes Check line on PDH 34

Mbit/s Trib. side
34Mbit/s AIS AIS yes
34 Mbit/s FERF FERF yes yes
Internal failure (hardware) Card Fail yes Replace unit

Card
equipped yes yes Insert right unit
mismatch
NOTE – Only for selected clock reference

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 400 / 436
436
Table 39. Full Matrix Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Excessive Bit Error Rate EX–

yes Check line on VC4 Path.
(POH–VC4) BER(B3)
Check remote equipment

Far–End receive failure
FERF (G1) yes on path which terminate
(VC4–POH)
VC4
Signal label mismatch C2 Mism yes Configuration error
Loss of TU12 Multiframe Check other equipment

LOM(H4) yes
on VC4 (likely configuration error)
TU Loss of Pointer TU–LOP yes Check line on path
TU Alarm Indication Sig- Check other equipment

TU–AIS yes
nal on Path
Table 40. Clock Reference Unit alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm Equipment
Alarm Description Unit Maintenance
Acronym Controller
Int Urg Nurg
Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 Loss yes
Internal Reference # 1 to # 6 Drift yes Check external reference

and connection with the
External Reference # 1 to # 6 Loss yes equipment
External Reference # 1 to # 6 Drift yes
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes yes Replace Unit
Unit inserted into slot equip. with Card

yes Insert right unit
another type of Unit Mismatch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Software mismatch SW MIS yes Update SW version
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 401 / 436
436
Table 41. AUX/EOW Alarms
Optical Indication

Alarm Equipment
Alarm Description Unit Maintenance
Acronym Controller
Int Urg Nurg
Loss of G. 703 signal LOS G. 703 yes Check line G. 703
Card Fail Card Fail yes yes Replace Unit
Unit inserted into slot equip. with Card Mis-
yes yes Insert right unit
another type of Unit match
Software mismatch SW MIS yes Update SW version
Table 42. ADM 600 INTERFACE Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Check Link LINE–DROP
Loss of Signal LOS yes
Shelf
Loss of FRAME LOF yes
Shelf
Multiplexer Section Alarm Check Link LINE–DROP
MS AIS yes
Ind Sig. Shelf
Multiplexer Section Check Link LINE–DROP
MS FERF yes
Far–End Rec. F Shelf
Multiplexer Section Ex-
cess. BIT Error Rate on MS EXBER yes
Shelf
B2
AU4 Alarm Ind. Sign. on Check Link LINE–DROP
AU–AIS yes
the Path Shelf
yes
Transmitter Fail MIT yes Replace unit
(1)
Loss of Multiframe LOM yes Check other Equipment
Card Fail CARD FAIL yes yes Replace Unit
Card mis-
equipped with other type yes yes Insert right unit
match
of unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(1) Only with the ADM 600 Interface not protected, otherwise with ADM 600 1+1 EPS protected the
NURG lamp will be activated
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 402 / 436
436
Table 43. STM 1 E MODULE Alarms
Optical Indication
Alarm
Acronym
Card Fail CARD FAIL yes Replace Unit
Table 44. Consequent Action Aggregate STM–4/STM–16
Consequent Action
AIS AIS AIS FERF FERF PPS LS

Alarm Fault
AU4
RSOH MSOH G1 MS
TRIB
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes Yes
EX–BER (B3) Yes

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 403 / 436
436
Table 45. Consequent Action Trib. STM1 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action

AIS AIS AIS FERF PPS
Alarm Fault FERF G1 FERF G1
AU4 STM1 LINE AGG
RSOH MSOH MS
AGG
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes
UPA Yes Yes
Table 46. Consequent Action Optic STM1 Trib.
Consequent Action
AIS AIS AIS FERF G1 FERF G1 FERF PPS LS

Alarm Fault
STM1 AGG
RSOH MSOH AU4 MS
LINE
LOS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes Yes Yes
AU4–LOP Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes Yes
UPA Yes Yes Yes

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 404 / 436
436
Table 47. Consequent Action 3 x 34 / 3 x 45 Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action
Alarm Fault AIS AIS FERF PPS
OUT C3 G1
LOS Yes
AIS Yes
UPA Yes Yes Yes
SgLBUnequ Yes
SgLbMIS Yes Yes
Table 48. Consequent Action Trib. 140 (140/STM1 switch. trib.)
Consequent Action
Alarm Fault AIS AIS AIS FERF FERF PPS
C4 TRIB LINE C12/3 V5 G1
LOS Yes
AIS
UPA Yes Yes Yes
C2Unequ Yes
C2Mism Yes Yes

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 405 / 436
436
Table 49. Consequent Action 21 x 2Mbit/s trib.
Consequent Action

Alarm Fault AIS AIS FERF PPS
TRIB LINE C12 V5
LOS Yes
LOF Yes
AIS Yes
TU –UPA Yes Yes Yes
SgLBUnequ Yes Yes
SgLbMIS Yes
Table 50. Consequent Action 34/2 TransMux and 5 x 2Mbit/s Tributary
Consequent Action
Alarm Fault AIS AIS FERF FERF PPS
TRIB LINE C12/3 V5 G1
2Mbit/s Loss Yes
2Mbit/s LOF Yes
2Mbit/s AIS Yes
2Mbit/s SgLbUnequip. Yes
2Mbit/s SgLbMIS Yes Yes
Unavailable TU path Yes Yes Yes
34Mbit/s LOSS Yes
34Mbit/s LOF Yes
34Mbit/s AIS Yes
34Mbit/s UNEQ SgLb Yes
34Mbit/s SgLbMIS Yes Yes
34Mbit/s UPA Yes Yes Yes

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 406 / 436
436
Table 51. Consequent Action FULL MATRIX
FULL MATRIX
Consequent Action
AIS FERF FERF FERF AIS PPS

Alarm Fault
AU4 G1 G1 G1 TU
VC4 VC3 V5
AU4–UPA Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXBER (B3) Yes
TU–UPA Yes Yes Yes
C2UNEQ Yes Yes
C2MISM Yes Yes Yes
LOM (H4) Yes Yes Yes
TU–LOP Yes Yes Yes Yes
TU–AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 52. Consequent Action ADM 600 Interface
Consequent Action
AIS FERF
AU4 MS
LOS Yes Yes
LOF Yes Yes
MS–AIS Yes Yes
MS–EXBER Yes Yes
AU4–AIS Yes
LOM Yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 407 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
408 / 436
5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE
No particular indication is given as to spares handling which is left to the Maintenance Administration.
The replacement procedures are executed as follows:

• Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace.

The setting options are specified in the tables on the Circuit Schematics which relate the
operations to achieve with the setting, and on the Layout drawings which indicate the exact
location of all the setting arrangements.
The cited documents are enclosed in the TECHNICAL HANDBOOK.
• Simply replace those units not provided with any software setting
• Replace those units having software setting (except for the Equipment Controller unit).
Should the program release of the spare unit be compatible with that of the faulty one, the unit
will become operative after having automatically downloaded the software setting options from
the Equipment Controller.
Should the release differ, then by means of the Craft Terminal download the software release
updated on the replaced unit. Following the indications of the General Procedure Section 2.2
on page 423.
• With regard to the Equipment Controller unit refer to the following Par. 5.1 on page 409
5.1 Equipment Controller unit replacement
Various procedures are utilized to replace a faulty controller unit (for both ESCT and SMEC 2 ), they
depend on the type of spares available:
• Spares belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to
replace.
• Spares belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from that of the
unit to replace.
• Spares belonging to other types of equipment or unknown.

In the of the case of ESCT Unit the subunit ”Memory espansion M8 F2R” must be equipped.
The flow–charts of Figure 271. on page 410 and Figure 272. on page 411 illustrates the procedures to
follow for each above mentioned type of spare unit.
The procedures aim at replacing the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted
faults.
Therefore, while replacing the Equipment Controller unit the equipment is regularly operating except for
the functions carried out by unit to be replaced (the switching operation of the plesiochronous tributaries
too).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 409 / 436
436
REMOVE THE FAULTY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
Go to Equipment controller SMEC2

HW–PRESET THE SPARE UNIT IDENTICAL TO THE ONE BEING
REPLACED EXCEPT FOR THE I1 DIP–SWITCH :

I1–1 OPEN (OFF), I1 – 2 CLOSED (ON)
TO FORCE THE CONFIGURATION DATA AUTOMATIC RESET Go to Microswitches "ON" positions
INSERT THE SPARE UNIT INTO THE ASSIGNED SLOT
THE RESET IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED DURING THE

CONTROLLER RESTART CONFIGURATION DATA
THE URG ALARM LED AND THE UNIT ALRM LED ( )ARE LIGHTING UP
AT THE END OF THIS PROCEDURE –THAT LASTS UTMOST 1 MIN. –

THE ABN LED LIGHTING SHOWS THE CONFIGURATION DATA RESET
COMPLETION
CHECK THAT THE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE WITH RIGHT

RELEASE HAS BEEN INSTALLED ON THE PC
IF OTHERWISE, LOAD IT AS INSTRUCTED IN THE
”COMMISSIONING ” SECTION
SPARE: SAME RELEASE SPARE: SAME EQUIPMENT SPARE: DIFFERENT

DIFFERENT RELEASE EQUIPMENT OR
UNKNOWN SOFTWARE SOURCE
C
A B
EXTRACT THE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER UNIT
DO YOU WANT TO UP–LOAD LOCAL AND ROUTING YES SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT
CONFIG. TO SET UP THE LINK WITH OS/RECT ? WITH THE DIP–SWITCH
I1–1 OPEN , I1–2 OPEN
NO
INSERT AGAIN THE SPARE EQUIPMENT
SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIP–SWITCH CONTROL. UNIT.– CHECK IN THE MAINT.
I1–1 CLOSE , l1–2 CLOSE MEMORY THE END OF DATA UP–LOAD
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT EXTRACT EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
CONNECT THE PC AND ACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT SET THE SPARE EQUIP. CONTR. UNIT WITH THE DIP–SWITCH
I1–1 CLOSE , l1–2 CLOSE
SW AS INSTRUCTED IN THE ”COMMISSIONING SECTION”
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUIP. CONTROLLER UNIT
LAUNCH THE CONFIGURATION FILES CHECK THE OS/RECT CONNECTION.

THROUGH THE VARIOUS CONFIGURATION APPLICATIONS THE OS/RECT OPERATOR IS ABLE TO SEND FIRST THE
NOTE : ALWAYS SEND FIRST THE ”CONNECTION CONFIGURATION AND THEN THE EQUIPMENT CONFIG. FILES.
CONFIGURATION” FILE, THEN THE ”EQUIPMENT
CONFIGURATION” ONE AND FINALLY THE REST.
NOTE: A B C SEE NEXT FIGURE END OF PROCEDURE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 271. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 1
ED 05 UPDATED 2003-12-12
ATNL 957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 410/ 436
436
A B
THE EQUIPMENT THE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE

SOFTWARE WITH RIGHT WITH RIGHT RELEASE AND
RELEASE MUST BE THE ”SWP–EQ. CONTROLLER
AVAILABLE SWDL” PRODUCT SOFTWARE
MUST BE AVAILABLE
IS THE IS THE
NO EQUIPMENT SW NO
EQUIPMENT SW
WITH RIGHT RELEASE WITH THE RIGHT
RELEASE INSTALLED
LOADED ON THE ON THE PC?
PC?
LOAD IT ON THE PC AS YES

YES INSTRUCTED IN THE INSTALL IT ON THE PC
PARA 2.1 AS INSTRUCTED IN THE
OF THE GENERAL PARA 2.1
PROCEDURE SECTION
OF THE GENERAL
PROCEDURE SECTION
THE ”SWP–EQ
CONTROLLER SWDL”
PRODUCT SOFTWARE
MUST BE AVAILABLE
IS THE
MANAGEMENT SW NO NO
IS THE
LOADED ON THE PC IN THE MANAGEMENT SW
SAME RELEASE LIKE THAT OF AVAILABLE ?
THE SPARE UNIT ?
YES
YES
LOAD IT ON THE PC AS IS THE
INSTRUCTED IN THE ”SWP–EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 3 NO
OF THE CONTROLLER SWDL”
”COMMISSIONING SECTION” PRODUCT INSTALLED
ON THE PC?
YES
INSTALL ATION OF THE PC
AS DESCRIBED IN THE
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT AND PARA 2.3.1
ACTIVATE THE MANAGEMENT SW AS INSTRUCTED IN THE
IN THE ”COMMISSIONING” SECTION GENERAL PROCEDURES
SECTION
ACTIVATE THE ”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD”

APPLICATION AND DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT
RELEASE AS INSTRUCTED IN THE CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT, ACTIVATE THE
”GENERAL PRODUCERS” SECTION, ”SWP–EQ. CONTROLLER SWDL” PRODUCT, AND
PARA 2.1 PROCEED AS INSTRUCTED IN THE
PARA 2.3.2
OF THE GENERAL PROCEDURES SECTION
TO DOWNLOAD THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT RELEASE
AT THE END OF DOWNLOADING THE RIGHT

RELEASE MANAGEMENT SW IS ACTIVED.
EXECUTE THE ”LOGIN” PROCEDURE
NOTE: A B C SEE PREVIOUS FIGURE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 272. EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER Unit replacement – 2
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 411 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
412 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
GENERAL PROCEDURES
413 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
414 / 436
1 INTRODUCTION
This section deals with the operations concerning the ”Software download ” procedures.
2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
The following details the operations inherent to software download.
Software download permits to software–load the equipment thereby facilitating release version updating
following product evolution.
The software download operations utilize the applicative software kit SWP–1651 SM of the new Release
containing the equipment software program.
To software download:
• install the SWP–1651 SM of the new Release application on the P.C.
• load the SWP–1651 SM of the new Release application on the equipment
To execute the download use is made of the SWP–CRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM applicative.
The type of software download operations depend on operating phase they belong. Specifically :
• Updating the software version during the in–service phase (OPERATION) and with Rel.w 2.1,
following the indications stated in para. ”SW DOWNLOAD FROM REL. ≥ 2.1” on page 416
In order to upgrade the Equipment SWP starting from Rel. 1.2., an intermediate step before
Rel.2.1 is necessary. ( refer to Rel. 2.1 Operator’s Handbook.).
• Unit replacement with a spare or extensions with different SW version (MAINTENANCE

PHASE).
Two cases are defined:
– EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER replacement.

The sequence of operations is carried out following the procedure indicated in
Figure 271. on page 410 and in Figure 272. on page 411.
In Figure 272. reference are made to the download operation presented in the following
paragraphs 2.1 on page 416 and 2.3.on page 424.
– Replacement or extension of units other than Equipment Controller

The operations are described in the paragraph 2.2 on page 423 .
The software product utilizes the Windows system.
The information reported in para. 4 ”INTRODUCTION” on page 51 of the DESCRIPTIONS section is also
applicable to instruments, commands and windows handling.
PC start–up and windows system control are specified in chapter 2 on page 351 of the COMMISSIONING
section.
The units with ”Software Mismatch” indication have different software version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. The Software Download applicative contained in the SWP CRAFT TERMINAL 1651SM is
described in para. 4.9 on page 297 ”SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD APPLICATION” of the
Description Section.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 415 / 436
436
2.1 SW Download from Rel. ≥ 2.1
N.B. Instead of the number of the release, are here indicated the terms ”previous” or ”old”
for the release already present on the equipment and the terms ”running” or ”new” for

the release to download on the equipment. The same procedure is used when

downloading different versions of the same release.
PRELIMINARY CHECK BEFORE DOWNLOADING
• Through Craft Terminal check that unstable Alarms are absent and no unit is affected with
”CARD NOT RESPONDING” or ”AUTOMATIC LASER SHUT DOWN ” conditions. In these
circumstances , after having solved the problem, select the CLEAR option in the Maintenance
Memories application and then close the Craft Terminal management applicative.
• Verify that no Remote Force Command is active and that the ABN alarm is lighting–off.
• Verify that the ”AREA ADDRESS” of the OS in the ”OS configuration” of the ”Local
configuration” application is correct.
• All backward Download or backward Activation of SW version must be done on consistent

Units.
The following procedure must be used to properly install the Sw package taken into account the
Equipment Controller type installed on the ADM ( ESCT or SMEC2) and which SW release is running.
If the Equipment controller to download is an ESCT with SW release w 2.1.00 and t 2.1.85 it must be
loaded for a first time with the new light SWP 1651SM as described starting from the following point 2)
up to point 7). Further download can be performed as indicated for the SMEC2 Unit.
The ESCT unit with the Rel w 2.1.85, or SMEC2 unit must be downloaded with the complete SWP
,following the procedure of the next point1 ) then jump to the point 6 ) .
The software version of the units can be checked in the file SWKIT.TXT of the SWP 1651SM,
diskette 1 as far as the complete package is concerned.
For the ”light” package the file SWKIT.TXT to be read is contained in disk 3. The first row pertains
to the Equipment software version to be loaded.
1) Install the complete SWP 1651SM package of the new release on the PC, (equipment SW
applicative) using the following floppies order : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 by performing the following
operations :
a) Insert the first diskette of the sequence in driver A
b) Open Windows File Manager and select driver A.
c) Activate the CTSFMNG.EXE file
d) The figure ”Install SW Package” appears; by clicking on the same title the screen of
Figure 273. on page 418 is displayed.
e) By clicking on the ”Confirm” label the installation begins.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
f) Sequentially insert the other diskette when asked for the next one till the complete
installation.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 416 / 436
436
2) install the light SWP 1651SM package on the PC using the following floppies in sequence :
3, 4, 5, 6, 2 by following the a ) to f ) sequence of operation previously described.
3) Download the light SWP on the Equipment and activated it, as described in the following
points:
g) Run the management applicative on the PC. Open the management applicative and select
the SW Download application, (see Figure 274. on page 419).The Figure 275. on page
419 appears.
To obtain the equipment downloading screen carry out the following operations:
• Clicking on ”Software Download Menu” of Figure 275. on page 419, Figure 276. on
page 420 will appear.
• Click on ”SW Downloading” and then Figure 277. on page 420 appears.
• Click on Download, Figure 278. on page 421 is displayed.
h) Delete the two figures representing the NE release on the ”NE type” field that must be
”1651SM”. By selecting the ”SW Package SELECTION” a list of the SW packages
installed will be displayed. Select the SW version pertaining to the package to be
downloaded (light or complete). Select ”Code Present” for downloading the cards present
on the equipment. By selecting ”Forced Download” all units will be downloaded even if they
are in new release. If no selection is made only the units of a different release will be
downloaded. By selecting ”Implicit Activation” at the end of download the new SW will
become automatically operative. If this selection is not made, at the end of the Download,
activate the new SW by entering the ”Software” option, then the ”SW Management” to
be activated.
N.B. The ”Server identification” selection must be Server on ECT
i) Select SW new package
j) Select ”Download” at the bottom–left of the screen indicated in Figure 278. on page 421,
and after acknowledgement continue to download. The ”Download progress” screen is
displayed showing Download status. At the end of the procedure the indication ”Download
completed successfully” will be displayed.
ATTENTION – After having started the SW Download the Operator may wait up to 15 min. to
acknowledge a message by the system
k) Check in the ”SW Information Application” in Figure 279. on page 421 that the new
version has been enabled and activated. Figure 279. on page 421 is obtained by clicking
on ”SW Package Information” on the screen of Figure 278. on page 421.
4) If the download of the light sw package is aborted , verify in the ”Maintenance memory”
application if the cause is a ”SW DL Err Programming FEP” ”SWDL” Group event, ”User
commands” Group entity. If true, go on without problems to point 6 ) . If not, try again to perform
the Download, starting from the first point and if it fails again activate a trouble shooting
procedure.
5) If the download is successfully performed, go to point 6 ) .
6) Proceed as indicated in points g ) to k ) to download the complete sw package

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7) When download is completed, sign–off the Craft terminal Management applicative and launch
it again.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 417 / 436
436
8) Recover the configuration files relevant to the previous release through the ”RECEIVE” function
to update the Craft Terminal whit the Configuration files of the NE current Release.
N.B. During the activation of the new downloaded SW, the NE active configuration files are

automatically converted by the Controller.

If the equipment is provided with the ”VC4 Matrix” Units, the new downloaded SW
adds a new configuration table referred to the ”140 Mbit/s Tributaries port enabling”
in which all the ports are enabled.
The other configuration files on CT, if any, (and not active upon the activation of the
downloaded new SWP) to be used with the new SW Release, must be converted through
the ADM.EXE file mentioned at para 2.1.1 on page 422.
If necessary, they must be sent to the equipment according to the following sequence:
firstly the connection files and then the equipment ones.
Figure 273. Install Software Package

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 418 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 275. Software Download main screen (data are an example)
Figure 274. Application Choice – Software Download (data are an example)
419 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 277. SW downloading choice (data are an example)
Figure 276. Software Download menu (data are an example)
420 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 279. SW information (data are an example)
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
Figure 278. Software downloading application (data are an example)
421 / 436
2.1.1 Use of the conversion files
As cited in para 2.1, point 8 ) on page 418, the active configuration files upon the activation of the
downloaded new SW Release, are automatically converted.

After the equipment download it is possible to convert the configuration files not active during the activation
of the new SWP, from the previous release format to the new release one.
The conversion program is called ”adm.exe” and is located in the directory:
”c:\<your_directory>\<equipment_name_and_rel>” where <your_directory> is the directory where
the SWP has been loaded . The default is ”c:\alcatel\<equipment_name_and_rel>\”
Activated it .
Open the File menu to select the type of file to convert.
Select the file to be converted using the mouse to move between directories.
Confirm the selection . A wait message will appear.
Finally select the name of the converted file and the directory where to place it and having to activate them
send the config. files (follow the sequence: firstly the connection ad then the equipment ones).
N.B. If the equipment is provided with the ”VC4 Matrix” Units, after having converted the
configuration files as cited above, enable the ”140 Mbit/s Tributary” ports, if any.
Hence send the converted and corrected configuration files to the equipment, according
to the sequence cited above.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 422 / 436
436
2.2 Replacement or Extensions of Units other than Equipment Controller, with no updated SW
This condition is possible when handling spares with other ADM equipment or with other releases of the
same equipment.
Proceed as follows:
1) Make sure that the management software is available, if otherwise install it as specified in the
INSTALLATION section, chapter 3 on page 353.
2) Make sure that the equipment software has been installed, if otherwise proceed to install it
as specified in para. 2.1 on page 416.
3) Insert the unit in a free slot on the shelf and equip it through the ”Equipment Configuration”
application.
4) From the ”Application Choice” menu ( Figure 274. on page 419 ) select ”Software Download”:
Figure 275. on page 419 will appear.
5) Click on ”Software Download Menu” to obtain the screen of Figure 276. on page 420.
6) Click on ”SW Down loading”, the screen of Figure 277. on page 420 will appear.
7) Select ”Download”, and than Figure 278. on page 421 (”SW Downloading”) will be displayed.
8) Figure 278. on page 421 permits to select the following:
– Code Present
– Implicit activation
– N.E. Type: set the indication 1651SM, without release indication
– SW package selection: select the running software
N.B. The ”Server identification” selection must be Server on ECT
– Don’t select ”Forced Download”
9) Click on Download label. The screen of ”Download Progress” is presented showing the
download status.
10 ) At the end of the procedure the screen displays the indication of ”Activation Completed
Successfully”.
If the units to be added to a 1651SM Rel. 2.5 C are DVB tributaries and/or 2 Mbit/s retiming tributaries
with SW release loaded 2.5 B , proceed as follows in order to update the new cards SW :
– Perform steps 1 ) and 2 )
– Insert the unit in a free slot on the shelf and equip it through the ”Equipment Configuration”
application as 34/45 tributary and 2 M tributary respectively .
– Perform the download as previously described in steps 4 ) to 10 )

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Open the ”Equipment configuration application” and configure the tributaries as DVB and
2Mbit/s retiming respectively.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 423 / 436
436
2.3 Spare Equipment Controller download, with unknown software
The sequence of operation for Equipment Controller replacement with spare, is presented in the
flow–chart of Figure 271. on page 410 and Figure 272. on page 411.

This chapter describes the use of the ” SWP–Eq. Controller SWDL”
This applicative must be used when a spare Equipment Controller unit has to be installed on the
equipment, when the SW release on the spare unit differs from the current one, and his management
software is not known or not available.
This applicative gives direct access to the SW download of the equipment’s management SW. Through
it the Equipment Controller unit will be updated to the SW being currently used.
Proceed as indicated in the paragraph below.
2.3.1 Installing the ”SWP equipment controller SWDL” applicative on the P.C.
• Insert the SW KIT ”Equipment Controller SWDL” diskette into the disk unit (A or B).
• Enter command:
WIN A:\SETUP
Upon receiving a transitory window, the screen of Figure 280. on page 426 will appear displaying the
product’s general data.
To obtain information on installation data select HELP (AIUTO)
By selecting EXIT (ESCI) the screen of Figure 281. on page 427 is displayed, and then by clicking on the
EXIT (ESCI) key the screen of Figure 282. on page 428 will appear.
By clicking on the OK key, the procedure is aborted. By clicking onto CONTINUE (CONTINUA) the screen
of Figure 280. on page 426 is accessed again.
• Select CONTINUE (CONTINUA) while working on screen of Figure 280. on page 426 to obtain
that of Figure 283. on page 429 into which the DIRECTORY will be inserted. The default
directory appears.
By clicking on the EXIT (ESCI) key, the screen of Figure 281. on page 427 will appear hence
aborting the procedure.
By selecting HELP (AIUTO) further information on installation is obtained.
• Click on the CONTINUE (CONTINUA) key to start–off the software download program
illustrated in Figure 284. on page 430.
This screen gives the possibility to suspend download by clicking on the ”suspend” (sospendi) key, a
confirm message will subsequently appear.
• After a transitory indication, the screen of Figure 285. on page 431 will be automatically
displayed stating that installation is completed. By clicking on the OK key the directory is created
specifying the icons that are automatically present on the Windows Manager Program (see
screen of Figure 286. on page 432 ).
If installation is not correct, messages will be sent to the operator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 424 / 436
436
2.3.2 Downloading the running release on the equipment
• The ”Read me” icon permits to obtain information needed to execute the application.
•
To access the Download Application sequentially click the icons namely, Communication,
Server and Manager. Figure 287. on page 432 will appear.
The sequence to follow is the same stated in para 2.1 on page 416, depending on the type of
Equipment Controller and on the SW release running.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 425 / 436
436
INSTALLATION PROGRAM
PRODUCTS INSTALLATION
– THIS PROGRAM EXECUTES THE COMPLETE PRODUCT
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CONTINUE EXIT HELP
Figure 280. Initial set–up SW Download

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 426 / 436
436
INSTALLATION INTERRUPTED
– INSTALLATION INCOMPLETE. PRODUCT WILL NOT BE PROPERLY INSTALLED IF

YOU QUIT NOW.
HOWEVER THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAN BE LAUNCHED AGAIN
CONTINUE EXIT
Figure 281. Download installation interruption

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 427 / 436
436
INCOMPLETE INSTALLATION
– THE PROGRAM HAS NOT BEEN COMPLETELY INSTALLED
– LAUNCH THE SETUP PROGRAM AGAIN
OK
Figure 282. Installation incomplete

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 428 / 436
436
PRODUCTS INSTALLATION
– THE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE WILL COPY THE FILE INTO THE FOLLOWING
DIRECTORY:
PATH : C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340
ANY PREVIOUS VERSION WILL BE OVER WRITTEN
CONTINUE EXIT HELP
Figure 283. Directory editing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 429 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
FILE
957.120.732 A
DESTINATION
A:\SR.SDFSRV.EXE
SETUP
C:\ECT\NECTAS\V340\COMSFINT.EXE
SUSPEND
V1.0.1
Figure 284. Installation in progress
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
430 / 436
COMPLETE INSTALLATION
THE INSTALLATION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION SEE THE OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK
OK
Figure 285. Installation completed

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 431 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
05
957.120.732 A
Figure 286. Installation icons
Figure 287. Software Download main screen
436
3AL 36566 AA AA
432 / 436
3 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK
3.1 Introduction
The procedure described below is utilized to upgrade a two–fiber link from the current release of 1651SM
to 1661SMC without loss of traffic.
This means modifying the line characteristics of the N.E., i.e., from 1651 SM to 1661 SM–C, with
subsequent replacement of the STM 4 Aggregate units with the STM 16 Aggregate units.
ATTENTION :
This upgrading is not allowed with R–EACT or EACT SWP .
This procedure is intended for ring protected connections.
It is also possible to upgrade point–to–point connections but with no protection mechanism

enabled , the traffic will be lost for the time necessary to upgrade the equipments.
3.2 Actions and preliminary verifications for 1651SM
In order to avoid temporary loss of traffic ( max. 30 seconds ), depending to the AU4’s allocation and the
composition ( structured or not structured ) of the data streams managed by STM4 Aggregates on the
nodes terminating a path, some “workarounds”, concerning the “Connections Configuration”, can be
adopted .
It is to be considered that for a successful result of this procedure, the main card has to be active wherever
( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled.
In the following cases of AU4’s connection, the amount of traffic loss is limited to switch time. The need
of a possible workaround is indicated:
[1] All AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) not structured (HO) connected: No workaround is required.
[2] First two or three AU4s ( #1 and #2 or #1, #2 and #3 ) not structured (HO) connected: No
workaround is required.
[3] Four AU4s ( from #1 to #4 ) structured (LO) connected : Configure the “Enhanced connectivity”
mode on each AU4.
[4] Less than four AU4s structured (LO) connected: Realize “TU’s d/i prot” connections in
“Enhanced connectivity” mode on the available ( empty ) AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4)
and configure the “Enhanced connectivity” mode also on the already connected AU4s.
In the cases of AU4’s connection below reported, a temporary traffic loss ( max. 15 seconds ) could occur
when updating “Equipment Configuration” file ( see par. 1.3 ) . As regards these cases, the upgrade
procedure is suggested to be done in “not congested” traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ).
[5] Four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the “Enhanced connectivity”
mode on each structured AU4.
N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• • all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr1 to Tr4 or to the
Tributary cards from Tr5 to Tr8.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 433 / 436
436
• • structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and not
structured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, among
the not structured connections, the pass–through ones must be the last to be allocated.

[6] Less than four AU4s structured and not structured connected : Configure the “Enhanced

connectivity” mode on each structured AU4 and realize “AU4’s d/i prot” ( that is not structured ) on
the available AU4s so to fill all the line capacity (STM4).
N.B. The workaround just described, is valid only if :
• • all the managed traffic is connected either to the Tributary cards from Tr#1 to Tr#4 or to
the Tributary cards from Tr#5 to Tr#8
• • structured connections have to be allocated on the first AU4s ( from #1 on ) and not
structured connections have to be allocated immediately after the AUs structured and, among
the not structured connections, the pass–through ones must be the last to be allocated.
The upgrade from STM4 Aggregate to STM16 Aggregate ( see par. 1.3 ) leads to temporary (30 seconds)
loss of traffic in the following cases of AU4’s connection:
[7] Less than four AU4s not structured with, at least, either AU4#1 or #2 or #3 not connected or in
pass–through connection.
[8] AU4s structured and not structured ( the whole four or less than four ) connected to tributary cards
belonging to different benches (that is distributed towards the whole group of tributaries from Tr#1
to Tr#8).
As previously suggested about cases [5] and [6], also in these cases, the upgrade procedure is suggested
to be done in “not congested” traffic period ( see par. 1.3 for more details ).
3.3 Upgrade
See Figure 288. on page 436
The following, details the operations inherent to upgrade a 1651SM ring network into 1661SMC ring
network in order to give a sequence of actions that must be followed in the substitution of the Aggregates.
– 1st step
Load the STM16 Aggregates to be used for upgrading phase with the Connection Configurations
shown in Table 53. on page 436. and with the ”Laser ON” condition active.
This operation must be done on stand alone equipment not belonging to the ring under upgrading,
equipped with Full Matrix and eight STM1 Tribs to check the working connections and, with the main
card active wherever ( that is for wichever kind of card ) the EPS protection scheme is enabled.
– 2nd step
Disconnect the Section # 1 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms), then extract STM4 Aggregate West of the
NE #1 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card, just provisioned as “East Aggregate” on the
stand–alone equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as
“West Aggregate”.
After an optical power check, connect the fibers.
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 434 / 436
436
– 3rd step
Disconnect the Section # 2 (Pattern Loss/AIS<50ms and no alarms present on struct. AU 4s), then
extract STM4 Aggregate West of the NE #2 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as
“East Aggregate” on the stand–alone equipment.

Extract STM4 Aggregate East of the NE#3 and insert the STM16 Aggregate card provisioned as
“West Aggregate” .
After an optical power check, connect the fibers.
– 4th step
Using the local Craft Terminal send in NE # 2 the relevant new Equipment Configuration (Pattern
Loss/AIS<50ms) and Local Configuration for DCC utility.
– 5th step
Repeat the steps 3rd and 4th for the Section # 3 , that is, NE # 3 and NE#4 up to the Section #
nth , that is, NE # nth and NE#1.
– Last step
Using the R–ECT / EM tool and starting from the NE#1, remove, if desired, first, the “Enhanced
Connectivity” mode from the structured AU4s before configured, then ( i.e. in a second step ), the
fictitious connections eventually installed to fill to STM4 capacity line.
Finally, send in each NE’s the relevant new connections to recover the complete new ring
configuration .
Consider that, in general, and according to the needs of the user, the physical substitution of STM4
Aggregate cards with STM16 Aggregate cards ( below described in 2nd, 3rd and 5th steps ) can be
executed at the same step, providing, in a second time, for updating the “Equipment Configuration” file
of each node ( with consistent STM16 Aggregates configuration ) through the R–ECT / EM.
In this case:
– Complete “1st step” by provisioning the STM16 Aggregates to be used with the relevant Local
Configuration for DCC utility and provision, also, each node of the ring to update with relevant Local
Configuration for DCC utility, about both STM4 ( already enabled ) and STM16 interfaces.
– Then , do not execute the “4th step”, and when all the STM16 cards are inserted ( not configured,
yet ), go to “Last step”, updating first, each node of the ring with the consistent STM16 Aggregate
cards configuration, then the Connections Configuration as, already described.
This way to realized the procedure is useful in those cases of AU4’s connection ( above described in par.
1.2 ), where the upgrade of aggregate cards could produce a temporary traffic loss: after the physical
substitution of aggregate cards, the user can decide the right moment when updating the “Equipment
Configuration”, minimizing the trouble due to possible loss of traffic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 435 / 436
436
Table 53. Connection Configuration to be used in the upgrade operations
AU4 DROP INSERT ALLOCATION

STM 1 TRIB AU4 NOT STRUCTURED MODE
TRIB # 1 AU4 # 1 D / I Bidir Unp E
TRIB # 5 AU4 # 1 D / I Bidir Unp W
section # 1 section # nth

Agg. Agg.
STM 4 STM 4
W E
E W
NE # 1
Agg. Agg.
STM 4 STM 4
NE # 2 NE # nth
Agg. Agg.
STM 4 STM 4
NE # 3
W E
E Agg. Agg. W
STM 4 STM 4
section # 2 section # 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 288. 1651SM ring network to be changed in a1661SM–C ring
END OF DOCUMENT
ED 05
957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 436 / 436
436

1651 Operators Handbook PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1651 Operators Handbook PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Operator’s Handbook

1651SM Rel.2.5 & 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5 & 1.5.1

957.120.732 A Ed.05 3AL 36566 AAAA Ed.05

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1 HW/SW PREREQUISITES FOR SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

05 990604 SC99060703 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE S.SCANABISSI ITAVE

1651SM 2.5&1661SM–C 1.5

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 1 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 2 / 436

2 START–UP OF THE PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

3 INSTALLATION OF THE ”SWP CRAFT TERMINAL” APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . 353

4 START–UP OF THE SWP CRAFT TERMINAL APPLICATIVE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

2 NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL AND Q2 MEDIATION

3 NE 1651 SM/1661 SM–C SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

4 DISPLAY OF THE NETWORK ELEMENT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

5 LOG ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

6 CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 3 / 436

7 OPERATING ROUTINE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

8 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

3 SOFTWARE SHUT–DOWN AND PC RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

5 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

3 1651SM RING NETWORK UPGRADING INTO 1661SMC RING NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 4 / 436

Figure 1. Operator identifier and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Figure 2. Alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Figure 48. Equipment Configuration– Synch. – SSM Value Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 5 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 6 / 436

Figure 108. DROP SHELF Connection Configuration – Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Figure 154. AS & C – Full Matrix, LOP of HPA, TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 7 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 208. G784 Performance Monitoring. File option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 8 / 436

Figure 216. Software Download selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 217. Software Download main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Figure 262. Network Configuration –Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 9 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Table 27. Full Matrix (NB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 10 / 436

Table 34. Alarms of the STM1 Optical Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

957.120.732 A 3AL 36566 AA AA 11 / 436

1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS